1 | \input texinfo
|
---|
2 | @setfilename ld.info
|
---|
3 | @c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
|
---|
4 | @c 2001, 2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
---|
5 | @syncodeindex ky cp
|
---|
6 | @include configdoc.texi
|
---|
7 | @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
|
---|
8 | @include ldver.texi
|
---|
9 |
|
---|
10 | @c @smallbook
|
---|
11 |
|
---|
12 | @macro gcctabopt{body}
|
---|
13 | @code{\body\}
|
---|
14 | @end macro
|
---|
15 |
|
---|
16 | @c man begin NAME
|
---|
17 | @ifset man
|
---|
18 | @c Configure for the generation of man pages
|
---|
19 | @set UsesEnvVars
|
---|
20 | @set GENERIC
|
---|
21 | @set A29K
|
---|
22 | @set ARC
|
---|
23 | @set ARM
|
---|
24 | @set D10V
|
---|
25 | @set D30V
|
---|
26 | @set H8/300
|
---|
27 | @set H8/500
|
---|
28 | @set HPPA
|
---|
29 | @set I370
|
---|
30 | @set I80386
|
---|
31 | @set I860
|
---|
32 | @set I960
|
---|
33 | @set M32R
|
---|
34 | @set M68HC11
|
---|
35 | @set M680X0
|
---|
36 | @set MCORE
|
---|
37 | @set MIPS
|
---|
38 | @set MMIX
|
---|
39 | @set MSP430
|
---|
40 | @set PDP11
|
---|
41 | @set PJ
|
---|
42 | @set SH
|
---|
43 | @set SPARC
|
---|
44 | @set TIC54X
|
---|
45 | @set V850
|
---|
46 | @set VAX
|
---|
47 | @set WIN32
|
---|
48 | @set XTENSA
|
---|
49 | @end ifset
|
---|
50 | @c man end
|
---|
51 |
|
---|
52 | @ifinfo
|
---|
53 | @format
|
---|
54 | START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
|
---|
55 | * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
|
---|
56 | END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
|
---|
57 | @end format
|
---|
58 | @end ifinfo
|
---|
59 |
|
---|
60 | @ifinfo
|
---|
61 | This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD version @value{VERSION}.
|
---|
62 |
|
---|
63 | Copyright (C) 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
|
---|
64 | 2001, 2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
---|
65 |
|
---|
66 | @ignore
|
---|
67 |
|
---|
68 | Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
|
---|
69 | under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
|
---|
70 | or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
|
---|
71 | with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
|
---|
72 | Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
|
---|
73 | section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
|
---|
74 |
|
---|
75 | Permission is granted to process this file through Tex and print the
|
---|
76 | results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
|
---|
77 | notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
|
---|
78 | (this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual).
|
---|
79 |
|
---|
80 | @end ignore
|
---|
81 | @end ifinfo
|
---|
82 | @iftex
|
---|
83 | @finalout
|
---|
84 | @setchapternewpage odd
|
---|
85 | @settitle Using LD, the GNU linker
|
---|
86 | @titlepage
|
---|
87 | @title Using ld
|
---|
88 | @subtitle The GNU linker
|
---|
89 | @sp 1
|
---|
90 | @subtitle @code{ld} version 2
|
---|
91 | @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
|
---|
92 | @author Steve Chamberlain
|
---|
93 | @author Ian Lance Taylor
|
---|
94 | @page
|
---|
95 |
|
---|
96 | @tex
|
---|
97 | {\parskip=0pt
|
---|
98 | \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
|
---|
99 | \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
|
---|
100 | \hfill {\it Using LD, the GNU linker}\par
|
---|
101 | \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
|
---|
102 | }
|
---|
103 | \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
|
---|
104 | @end tex
|
---|
105 |
|
---|
106 | @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
|
---|
107 | @c man begin COPYRIGHT
|
---|
108 | Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
|
---|
109 | 2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
---|
110 |
|
---|
111 | Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
|
---|
112 | under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
|
---|
113 | or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
|
---|
114 | with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
|
---|
115 | Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
|
---|
116 | section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
|
---|
117 | @c man end
|
---|
118 |
|
---|
119 | @end titlepage
|
---|
120 | @end iftex
|
---|
121 | @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
|
---|
122 |
|
---|
123 | @ifnottex
|
---|
124 | @node Top
|
---|
125 | @top Using ld
|
---|
126 | This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld version @value{VERSION}.
|
---|
127 |
|
---|
128 | This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
|
---|
129 | Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
|
---|
130 | section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
|
---|
131 |
|
---|
132 | @menu
|
---|
133 | * Overview:: Overview
|
---|
134 | * Invocation:: Invocation
|
---|
135 | * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
|
---|
136 | @ifset GENERIC
|
---|
137 | * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
|
---|
138 | @end ifset
|
---|
139 | @ifclear GENERIC
|
---|
140 | @ifset H8300
|
---|
141 | * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
|
---|
142 | @end ifset
|
---|
143 | @ifset Renesas
|
---|
144 | * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
|
---|
145 | @end ifset
|
---|
146 | @ifset I960
|
---|
147 | * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
|
---|
148 | @end ifset
|
---|
149 | @ifset ARM
|
---|
150 | * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
|
---|
151 | @end ifset
|
---|
152 | @ifset HPPA
|
---|
153 | * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
|
---|
154 | @end ifset
|
---|
155 | @ifset TICOFF
|
---|
156 | * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
|
---|
157 | @end ifset
|
---|
158 | @ifset WIN32
|
---|
159 | * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
|
---|
160 | @end ifset
|
---|
161 | @ifset XTENSA
|
---|
162 | * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
|
---|
163 | @end ifset
|
---|
164 | @end ifclear
|
---|
165 | @ifclear SingleFormat
|
---|
166 | * BFD:: BFD
|
---|
167 | @end ifclear
|
---|
168 | @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
|
---|
169 |
|
---|
170 | * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
|
---|
171 | * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
|
---|
172 | * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
|
---|
173 | * Index:: Index
|
---|
174 | @end menu
|
---|
175 | @end ifnottex
|
---|
176 |
|
---|
177 | @node Overview
|
---|
178 | @chapter Overview
|
---|
179 |
|
---|
180 | @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
|
---|
181 | @cindex what is this?
|
---|
182 |
|
---|
183 | @ifset man
|
---|
184 | @c man begin SYNOPSIS
|
---|
185 | ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
|
---|
186 | @c man end
|
---|
187 |
|
---|
188 | @c man begin SEEALSO
|
---|
189 | ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
|
---|
190 | the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
|
---|
191 | @file{ld}.
|
---|
192 | @c man end
|
---|
193 | @end ifset
|
---|
194 |
|
---|
195 | @c man begin DESCRIPTION
|
---|
196 |
|
---|
197 | @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
|
---|
198 | their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
|
---|
199 | compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
|
---|
200 |
|
---|
201 | @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
|
---|
202 | a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
|
---|
203 | to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
|
---|
204 |
|
---|
205 | @ifset man
|
---|
206 | @c For the man only
|
---|
207 | This man page does not describe the command language; see the
|
---|
208 | @command{ld} entry in @code{info}, or the manual
|
---|
209 | ld: the GNU linker, for full details on the command language and
|
---|
210 | on other aspects of the GNU linker.
|
---|
211 | @end ifset
|
---|
212 |
|
---|
213 | @ifclear SingleFormat
|
---|
214 | This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
|
---|
215 | to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
|
---|
216 | write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
|
---|
217 | @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
|
---|
218 | available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
|
---|
219 | @end ifclear
|
---|
220 |
|
---|
221 | Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
|
---|
222 | linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
|
---|
223 | execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
|
---|
224 | @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
|
---|
225 | (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
|
---|
226 |
|
---|
227 | @c man end
|
---|
228 |
|
---|
229 | @node Invocation
|
---|
230 | @chapter Invocation
|
---|
231 |
|
---|
232 | @c man begin DESCRIPTION
|
---|
233 |
|
---|
234 | The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
|
---|
235 | and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
|
---|
236 | you have many choices to control its behavior.
|
---|
237 |
|
---|
238 | @c man end
|
---|
239 |
|
---|
240 | @ifset UsesEnvVars
|
---|
241 | @menu
|
---|
242 | * Options:: Command Line Options
|
---|
243 | * Environment:: Environment Variables
|
---|
244 | @end menu
|
---|
245 |
|
---|
246 | @node Options
|
---|
247 | @section Command Line Options
|
---|
248 | @end ifset
|
---|
249 |
|
---|
250 | @cindex command line
|
---|
251 | @cindex options
|
---|
252 |
|
---|
253 | @c man begin OPTIONS
|
---|
254 |
|
---|
255 | The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
|
---|
256 | practice few of them are used in any particular context.
|
---|
257 | @cindex standard Unix system
|
---|
258 | For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
|
---|
259 | object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
|
---|
260 | link a file @code{hello.o}:
|
---|
261 |
|
---|
262 | @smallexample
|
---|
263 | ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
|
---|
264 | @end smallexample
|
---|
265 |
|
---|
266 | This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
|
---|
267 | result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
|
---|
268 | the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
|
---|
269 | directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
|
---|
270 |
|
---|
271 | Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
|
---|
272 | point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
|
---|
273 | as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
|
---|
274 | which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
|
---|
275 | files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
|
---|
276 | different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
|
---|
277 | occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
|
---|
278 | option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
|
---|
279 | noted in the descriptions below.
|
---|
280 |
|
---|
281 | @cindex object files
|
---|
282 | Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
|
---|
283 | together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
|
---|
284 | options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
|
---|
285 | an option and its argument.
|
---|
286 |
|
---|
287 | Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
|
---|
288 | specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
|
---|
289 | and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
|
---|
290 | are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
|
---|
291 | message @samp{No input files}.
|
---|
292 |
|
---|
293 | If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
|
---|
294 | assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
|
---|
295 | augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
|
---|
296 | linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
|
---|
297 | permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
|
---|
298 | or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
|
---|
299 | @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Note that
|
---|
300 | specifying a script in this way merely augments the main linker script;
|
---|
301 | use the @samp{-T} option to replace the default linker script entirely.
|
---|
302 | @xref{Scripts}.
|
---|
303 |
|
---|
304 | For options whose names are a single letter,
|
---|
305 | option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
|
---|
306 | whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
|
---|
307 | option that requires them.
|
---|
308 |
|
---|
309 | For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
|
---|
310 | precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
|
---|
311 | @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
|
---|
312 | this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
|
---|
313 | only be preceeded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
|
---|
314 | @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
|
---|
315 | name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
|
---|
316 | output.
|
---|
317 |
|
---|
318 | Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
|
---|
319 | option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
|
---|
320 | immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
|
---|
321 | @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
|
---|
322 | Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
|
---|
323 | accepted.
|
---|
324 |
|
---|
325 | Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
|
---|
326 | (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
|
---|
327 | prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
|
---|
328 | compiler driver) like this:
|
---|
329 |
|
---|
330 | @smallexample
|
---|
331 | gcc -Wl,--startgroup foo.o bar.o -Wl,--endgroup
|
---|
332 | @end smallexample
|
---|
333 |
|
---|
334 | This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
|
---|
335 | silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link.
|
---|
336 |
|
---|
337 | Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
|
---|
338 | linker:
|
---|
339 |
|
---|
340 | @table @gcctabopt
|
---|
341 | @kindex -a@var{keyword}
|
---|
342 | @item -a@var{keyword}
|
---|
343 | This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
|
---|
344 | argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
|
---|
345 | @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
|
---|
346 | @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
|
---|
347 | to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
|
---|
348 |
|
---|
349 | @ifset I960
|
---|
350 | @cindex architectures
|
---|
351 | @kindex -A@var{arch}
|
---|
352 | @item -A@var{architecture}
|
---|
353 | @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
|
---|
354 | @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
|
---|
355 | In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
|
---|
356 | Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
|
---|
357 | @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
|
---|
358 | the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
|
---|
359 | archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
|
---|
360 | family}, for details.
|
---|
361 |
|
---|
362 | Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
|
---|
363 | other architecture families.
|
---|
364 | @end ifset
|
---|
365 |
|
---|
366 | @ifclear SingleFormat
|
---|
367 | @cindex binary input format
|
---|
368 | @kindex -b @var{format}
|
---|
369 | @kindex --format=@var{format}
|
---|
370 | @cindex input format
|
---|
371 | @cindex input format
|
---|
372 | @item -b @var{input-format}
|
---|
373 | @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
|
---|
374 | @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
|
---|
375 | file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
|
---|
376 | @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
|
---|
377 | that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
|
---|
378 | configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
|
---|
379 | to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
|
---|
380 | default input format the most usual format on each machine.
|
---|
381 | @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
|
---|
382 | supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
|
---|
383 | formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
|
---|
384 | @xref{BFD}.
|
---|
385 |
|
---|
386 | You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
|
---|
387 | binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
|
---|
388 | linking object files of different formats), by including
|
---|
389 | @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
|
---|
390 | particular format.
|
---|
391 |
|
---|
392 | The default format is taken from the environment variable
|
---|
393 | @code{GNUTARGET}.
|
---|
394 | @ifset UsesEnvVars
|
---|
395 | @xref{Environment}.
|
---|
396 | @end ifset
|
---|
397 | You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
|
---|
398 | @code{TARGET};
|
---|
399 | @ifclear man
|
---|
400 | see @ref{Format Commands}.
|
---|
401 | @end ifclear
|
---|
402 | @end ifclear
|
---|
403 |
|
---|
404 | @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
|
---|
405 | @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
|
---|
406 | @cindex compatibility, MRI
|
---|
407 | @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
|
---|
408 | @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
|
---|
409 | For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
|
---|
410 | files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
|
---|
411 | @ifclear man
|
---|
412 | @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
|
---|
413 | @end ifclear
|
---|
414 | @ifset man
|
---|
415 | the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
|
---|
416 | @end ifset
|
---|
417 | Introduce MRI script files with
|
---|
418 | the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
|
---|
419 | scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
|
---|
420 | If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
|
---|
421 | specified by any @samp{-L} options.
|
---|
422 |
|
---|
423 | @cindex common allocation
|
---|
424 | @kindex -d
|
---|
425 | @kindex -dc
|
---|
426 | @kindex -dp
|
---|
427 | @item -d
|
---|
428 | @itemx -dc
|
---|
429 | @itemx -dp
|
---|
430 | These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
|
---|
431 | compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
|
---|
432 | even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
|
---|
433 | script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
|
---|
434 | @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
|
---|
435 |
|
---|
436 | @cindex entry point, from command line
|
---|
437 | @kindex -e @var{entry}
|
---|
438 | @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
|
---|
439 | @item -e @var{entry}
|
---|
440 | @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
|
---|
441 | Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
|
---|
442 | program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
|
---|
443 | named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
|
---|
444 | and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
|
---|
445 | base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
|
---|
446 | @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
|
---|
447 | and other ways of specifying the entry point.
|
---|
448 |
|
---|
449 | @cindex dynamic symbol table
|
---|
450 | @kindex -E
|
---|
451 | @kindex --export-dynamic
|
---|
452 | @item -E
|
---|
453 | @itemx --export-dynamic
|
---|
454 | When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to the
|
---|
455 | dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the set of symbols
|
---|
456 | which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
|
---|
457 |
|
---|
458 | If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will normally
|
---|
459 | contain only those symbols which are referenced by some dynamic object
|
---|
460 | mentioned in the link.
|
---|
461 |
|
---|
462 | If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
|
---|
463 | back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
|
---|
464 | dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
|
---|
465 | linking the program itself.
|
---|
466 |
|
---|
467 | You can also use the version script to control what symbols should
|
---|
468 | be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
|
---|
469 | See the description of @samp{--version-script} in @ref{VERSION}.
|
---|
470 |
|
---|
471 | @ifclear SingleFormat
|
---|
472 | @cindex big-endian objects
|
---|
473 | @cindex endianness
|
---|
474 | @kindex -EB
|
---|
475 | @item -EB
|
---|
476 | Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
|
---|
477 |
|
---|
478 | @cindex little-endian objects
|
---|
479 | @kindex -EL
|
---|
480 | @item -EL
|
---|
481 | Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
|
---|
482 | @end ifclear
|
---|
483 |
|
---|
484 | @kindex -f
|
---|
485 | @kindex --auxiliary
|
---|
486 | @item -f
|
---|
487 | @itemx --auxiliary @var{name}
|
---|
488 | When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
|
---|
489 | to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
|
---|
490 | table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
|
---|
491 | symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
|
---|
492 |
|
---|
493 | If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
|
---|
494 | run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
|
---|
495 | the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
|
---|
496 | first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
|
---|
497 | @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
|
---|
498 | in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
|
---|
499 | Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
|
---|
500 | implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
|
---|
501 | machine specific performance.
|
---|
502 |
|
---|
503 | This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
|
---|
504 | will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
|
---|
505 |
|
---|
506 | @kindex -F
|
---|
507 | @kindex --filter
|
---|
508 | @item -F @var{name}
|
---|
509 | @itemx --filter @var{name}
|
---|
510 | When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
|
---|
511 | the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
|
---|
512 | of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
|
---|
513 | on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
|
---|
514 |
|
---|
515 | If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
|
---|
516 | run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
|
---|
517 | dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
|
---|
518 | filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
|
---|
519 | found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
|
---|
520 | used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
|
---|
521 | @var{name}.
|
---|
522 |
|
---|
523 | Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
|
---|
524 | toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
|
---|
525 | object files.
|
---|
526 | @ifclear SingleFormat
|
---|
527 | The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
|
---|
528 | @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
|
---|
529 | @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
|
---|
530 | environment variable.
|
---|
531 | @end ifclear
|
---|
532 | The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
|
---|
533 | creating an ELF shared object.
|
---|
534 |
|
---|
535 | @cindex finalization function
|
---|
536 | @kindex -fini
|
---|
537 | @item -fini @var{name}
|
---|
538 | When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
|
---|
539 | executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
|
---|
540 | address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
|
---|
541 | the function to call.
|
---|
542 |
|
---|
543 | @kindex -g
|
---|
544 | @item -g
|
---|
545 | Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
|
---|
546 |
|
---|
547 | @kindex -G
|
---|
548 | @kindex --gpsize
|
---|
549 | @cindex object size
|
---|
550 | @item -G@var{value}
|
---|
551 | @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
|
---|
552 | Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
|
---|
553 | @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
|
---|
554 | MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
|
---|
555 | sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
|
---|
556 |
|
---|
557 | @cindex runtime library name
|
---|
558 | @kindex -h@var{name}
|
---|
559 | @kindex -soname=@var{name}
|
---|
560 | @item -h@var{name}
|
---|
561 | @itemx -soname=@var{name}
|
---|
562 | When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
|
---|
563 | the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
|
---|
564 | which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
|
---|
565 | linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
|
---|
566 | field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
|
---|
567 |
|
---|
568 | @kindex -i
|
---|
569 | @cindex incremental link
|
---|
570 | @item -i
|
---|
571 | Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
|
---|
572 |
|
---|
573 | @cindex initialization function
|
---|
574 | @kindex -init
|
---|
575 | @item -init @var{name}
|
---|
576 | When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
|
---|
577 | executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
|
---|
578 | of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
|
---|
579 | function to call.
|
---|
580 |
|
---|
581 | @cindex archive files, from cmd line
|
---|
582 | @kindex -l@var{archive}
|
---|
583 | @kindex --library=@var{archive}
|
---|
584 | @item -l@var{archive}
|
---|
585 | @itemx --library=@var{archive}
|
---|
586 | Add archive file @var{archive} to the list of files to link. This
|
---|
587 | option may be used any number of times. @command{ld} will search its
|
---|
588 | path-list for occurrences of @code{lib@var{archive}.a} for every
|
---|
589 | @var{archive} specified.
|
---|
590 |
|
---|
591 | On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
|
---|
592 | libraries with extensions other than @code{.a}. Specifically, on ELF
|
---|
593 | and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library with
|
---|
594 | an extension of @code{.so} before searching for one with an extension of
|
---|
595 | @code{.a}. By convention, a @code{.so} extension indicates a shared
|
---|
596 | library.
|
---|
597 |
|
---|
598 | The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
|
---|
599 | specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
|
---|
600 | was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
|
---|
601 | command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
|
---|
602 | archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
|
---|
603 | the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
|
---|
604 |
|
---|
605 | See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
|
---|
606 | archives multiple times.
|
---|
607 |
|
---|
608 | You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
|
---|
609 |
|
---|
610 | @ifset GENERIC
|
---|
611 | This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
|
---|
612 | if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
|
---|
613 | behaviour of the AIX linker.
|
---|
614 | @end ifset
|
---|
615 |
|
---|
616 | @cindex search directory, from cmd line
|
---|
617 | @kindex -L@var{dir}
|
---|
618 | @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
|
---|
619 | @item -L@var{searchdir}
|
---|
620 | @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
|
---|
621 | Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
|
---|
622 | for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
|
---|
623 | option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
|
---|
624 | in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
|
---|
625 | on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
|
---|
626 | @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
|
---|
627 | order in which the options appear.
|
---|
628 |
|
---|
629 | If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
|
---|
630 | by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
|
---|
631 |
|
---|
632 | @ifset UsesEnvVars
|
---|
633 | The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
|
---|
634 | @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
|
---|
635 | some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
|
---|
636 | @end ifset
|
---|
637 |
|
---|
638 | The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
|
---|
639 | @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
|
---|
640 | at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
|
---|
641 |
|
---|
642 | @cindex emulation
|
---|
643 | @kindex -m @var{emulation}
|
---|
644 | @item -m@var{emulation}
|
---|
645 | Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
|
---|
646 | emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
|
---|
647 |
|
---|
648 | If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
|
---|
649 | @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
|
---|
650 |
|
---|
651 | Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
|
---|
652 | configured.
|
---|
653 |
|
---|
654 | @cindex link map
|
---|
655 | @kindex -M
|
---|
656 | @kindex --print-map
|
---|
657 | @item -M
|
---|
658 | @itemx --print-map
|
---|
659 | Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
|
---|
660 | information about the link, including the following:
|
---|
661 |
|
---|
662 | @itemize @bullet
|
---|
663 | @item
|
---|
664 | Where object files and symbols are mapped into memory.
|
---|
665 | @item
|
---|
666 | How common symbols are allocated.
|
---|
667 | @item
|
---|
668 | All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
|
---|
669 | which caused the archive member to be brought in.
|
---|
670 | @end itemize
|
---|
671 |
|
---|
672 | @kindex -n
|
---|
673 | @cindex read-only text
|
---|
674 | @cindex NMAGIC
|
---|
675 | @kindex --nmagic
|
---|
676 | @item -n
|
---|
677 | @itemx --nmagic
|
---|
678 | Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
|
---|
679 | @code{NMAGIC} if possible.
|
---|
680 |
|
---|
681 | @kindex -N
|
---|
682 | @kindex --omagic
|
---|
683 | @cindex read/write from cmd line
|
---|
684 | @cindex OMAGIC
|
---|
685 | @item -N
|
---|
686 | @itemx --omagic
|
---|
687 | Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
|
---|
688 | not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
|
---|
689 | libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
|
---|
690 | mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}.
|
---|
691 |
|
---|
692 | @kindex --no-omagic
|
---|
693 | @cindex OMAGIC
|
---|
694 | @item --no-omagic
|
---|
695 | This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
|
---|
696 | sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
|
---|
697 | be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
|
---|
698 | shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
|
---|
699 |
|
---|
700 | @kindex -o @var{output}
|
---|
701 | @kindex --output=@var{output}
|
---|
702 | @cindex naming the output file
|
---|
703 | @item -o @var{output}
|
---|
704 | @itemx --output=@var{output}
|
---|
705 | Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
|
---|
706 | option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
|
---|
707 | script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
|
---|
708 |
|
---|
709 | @kindex -O @var{level}
|
---|
710 | @cindex generating optimized output
|
---|
711 | @item -O @var{level}
|
---|
712 | If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
|
---|
713 | the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
|
---|
714 | should only be enabled for the final binary.
|
---|
715 |
|
---|
716 | @kindex -q
|
---|
717 | @kindex --emit-relocs
|
---|
718 | @cindex retain relocations in final executable
|
---|
719 | @item -q
|
---|
720 | @itemx --emit-relocs
|
---|
721 | Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked exececutables.
|
---|
722 | Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
|
---|
723 | order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
|
---|
724 | in larger executables.
|
---|
725 |
|
---|
726 | This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
|
---|
727 |
|
---|
728 | @cindex partial link
|
---|
729 | @cindex relocatable output
|
---|
730 | @kindex -r
|
---|
731 | @kindex --relocateable
|
---|
732 | @item -r
|
---|
733 | @itemx --relocateable
|
---|
734 | Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
|
---|
735 | turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
|
---|
736 | linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
|
---|
737 | magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
|
---|
738 | @code{OMAGIC}.
|
---|
739 | @c ; see @option{-N}.
|
---|
740 | If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
|
---|
741 | linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
|
---|
742 | constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
|
---|
743 |
|
---|
744 | When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
|
---|
745 | partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
|
---|
746 | relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
|
---|
747 | example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
|
---|
748 | with input files in other formats at all.
|
---|
749 |
|
---|
750 | This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
|
---|
751 |
|
---|
752 | @kindex -R @var{file}
|
---|
753 | @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
|
---|
754 | @cindex symbol-only input
|
---|
755 | @item -R @var{filename}
|
---|
756 | @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
|
---|
757 | Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
|
---|
758 | relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
|
---|
759 | to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
|
---|
760 | programs. You may use this option more than once.
|
---|
761 |
|
---|
762 | For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
|
---|
763 | followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
|
---|
764 | the @option{-rpath} option.
|
---|
765 |
|
---|
766 | @kindex -s
|
---|
767 | @kindex --strip-all
|
---|
768 | @cindex strip all symbols
|
---|
769 | @item -s
|
---|
770 | @itemx --strip-all
|
---|
771 | Omit all symbol information from the output file.
|
---|
772 |
|
---|
773 | @kindex -S
|
---|
774 | @kindex --strip-debug
|
---|
775 | @cindex strip debugger symbols
|
---|
776 | @item -S
|
---|
777 | @itemx --strip-debug
|
---|
778 | Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
|
---|
779 |
|
---|
780 | @kindex -t
|
---|
781 | @kindex --trace
|
---|
782 | @cindex input files, displaying
|
---|
783 | @item -t
|
---|
784 | @itemx --trace
|
---|
785 | Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
|
---|
786 |
|
---|
787 | @kindex -T @var{script}
|
---|
788 | @kindex --script=@var{script}
|
---|
789 | @cindex script files
|
---|
790 | @item -T @var{scriptfile}
|
---|
791 | @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
|
---|
792 | Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
|
---|
793 | @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
|
---|
794 | @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
|
---|
795 | output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
|
---|
796 | the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
|
---|
797 | specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
|
---|
798 | options accumulate.
|
---|
799 |
|
---|
800 | @kindex -u @var{symbol}
|
---|
801 | @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
|
---|
802 | @cindex undefined symbol
|
---|
803 | @item -u @var{symbol}
|
---|
804 | @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
|
---|
805 | Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
|
---|
806 | symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
|
---|
807 | modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
|
---|
808 | different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
|
---|
809 | option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
|
---|
810 |
|
---|
811 | @kindex -Ur
|
---|
812 | @cindex constructors
|
---|
813 | @item -Ur
|
---|
814 | For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
|
---|
815 | @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
|
---|
816 | turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
|
---|
817 | @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
|
---|
818 | It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
|
---|
819 | with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
|
---|
820 | be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
|
---|
821 | @samp{-r} for the others.
|
---|
822 |
|
---|
823 | @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
|
---|
824 | @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
|
---|
825 | Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
|
---|
826 | @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
|
---|
827 | missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
|
---|
828 | specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
|
---|
829 | multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
|
---|
830 | input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
|
---|
831 | in a linker script.
|
---|
832 |
|
---|
833 | @kindex -v
|
---|
834 | @kindex -V
|
---|
835 | @kindex --version
|
---|
836 | @cindex version
|
---|
837 | @item -v
|
---|
838 | @itemx --version
|
---|
839 | @itemx -V
|
---|
840 | Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
|
---|
841 | lists the supported emulations.
|
---|
842 |
|
---|
843 | @kindex -x
|
---|
844 | @kindex --discard-all
|
---|
845 | @cindex deleting local symbols
|
---|
846 | @item -x
|
---|
847 | @itemx --discard-all
|
---|
848 | Delete all local symbols.
|
---|
849 |
|
---|
850 | @kindex -X
|
---|
851 | @kindex --discard-locals
|
---|
852 | @cindex local symbols, deleting
|
---|
853 | @cindex L, deleting symbols beginning
|
---|
854 | @item -X
|
---|
855 | @itemx --discard-locals
|
---|
856 | Delete all temporary local symbols. For most targets, this is all local
|
---|
857 | symbols whose names begin with @samp{L}.
|
---|
858 |
|
---|
859 | @kindex -y @var{symbol}
|
---|
860 | @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
|
---|
861 | @cindex symbol tracing
|
---|
862 | @item -y @var{symbol}
|
---|
863 | @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
|
---|
864 | Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
|
---|
865 | option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
|
---|
866 | to prepend an underscore.
|
---|
867 |
|
---|
868 | This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
|
---|
869 | don't know where the reference is coming from.
|
---|
870 |
|
---|
871 | @kindex -Y @var{path}
|
---|
872 | @item -Y @var{path}
|
---|
873 | Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
|
---|
874 | for Solaris compatibility.
|
---|
875 |
|
---|
876 | @kindex -z @var{keyword}
|
---|
877 | @item -z @var{keyword}
|
---|
878 | The recognized keywords are @code{initfirst}, @code{interpose},
|
---|
879 | @code{loadfltr}, @code{nodefaultlib}, @code{nodelete}, @code{nodlopen},
|
---|
880 | @code{nodump}, @code{now}, @code{origin}, @code{combreloc}, @code{nocombreloc}
|
---|
881 | and @code{nocopyreloc}.
|
---|
882 | The other keywords are
|
---|
883 | ignored for Solaris compatibility. @code{initfirst} marks the object
|
---|
884 | to be initialized first at runtime before any other objects.
|
---|
885 | @code{interpose} marks the object that its symbol table interposes
|
---|
886 | before all symbols but the primary executable. @code{loadfltr} marks
|
---|
887 | the object that its filtees be processed immediately at runtime.
|
---|
888 | @code{nodefaultlib} marks the object that the search for dependencies
|
---|
889 | of this object will ignore any default library search paths.
|
---|
890 | @code{nodelete} marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
|
---|
891 | @code{nodlopen} marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
|
---|
892 | @code{nodump} marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
|
---|
893 | @code{now} marks the object with the non-lazy runtime binding.
|
---|
894 | @code{origin} marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
|
---|
895 | @code{defs} disallows undefined symbols.
|
---|
896 | @code{muldefs} allows multiple definitions.
|
---|
897 | @code{combreloc} combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them
|
---|
898 | to make dynamic symbol lookup caching possible.
|
---|
899 | @code{nocombreloc} disables multiple reloc sections combining.
|
---|
900 | @code{nocopyreloc} disables production of copy relocs.
|
---|
901 |
|
---|
902 | @kindex -(
|
---|
903 | @cindex groups of archives
|
---|
904 | @item -( @var{archives} -)
|
---|
905 | @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
|
---|
906 | The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
|
---|
907 | either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
|
---|
908 |
|
---|
909 | The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
|
---|
910 | references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
|
---|
911 | the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
|
---|
912 | archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
|
---|
913 | object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
|
---|
914 | would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
|
---|
915 | they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
|
---|
916 | resolved.
|
---|
917 |
|
---|
918 | Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
|
---|
919 | it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
|
---|
920 | more archives.
|
---|
921 |
|
---|
922 | @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
|
---|
923 | @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
|
---|
924 | @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
|
---|
925 | @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
|
---|
926 | Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
|
---|
927 | recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
|
---|
928 | and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
|
---|
929 | the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
|
---|
930 | behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
|
---|
931 | so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
|
---|
932 | restore the old behaviour.
|
---|
933 |
|
---|
934 | @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
|
---|
935 | @item -assert @var{keyword}
|
---|
936 | This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
|
---|
937 |
|
---|
938 | @kindex -Bdynamic
|
---|
939 | @kindex -dy
|
---|
940 | @kindex -call_shared
|
---|
941 | @item -Bdynamic
|
---|
942 | @itemx -dy
|
---|
943 | @itemx -call_shared
|
---|
944 | Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
|
---|
945 | for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
|
---|
946 | default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
|
---|
947 | for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
|
---|
948 | multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
|
---|
949 | @option{-l} options which follow it.
|
---|
950 |
|
---|
951 | @kindex -Bgroup
|
---|
952 | @item -Bgroup
|
---|
953 | Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
|
---|
954 | section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
|
---|
955 | object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
|
---|
956 | @option{--no-undefined} is implied. This option is only meaningful on ELF
|
---|
957 | platforms which support shared libraries.
|
---|
958 |
|
---|
959 | @kindex -Bstatic
|
---|
960 | @kindex -dn
|
---|
961 | @kindex -non_shared
|
---|
962 | @kindex -static
|
---|
963 | @item -Bstatic
|
---|
964 | @itemx -dn
|
---|
965 | @itemx -non_shared
|
---|
966 | @itemx -static
|
---|
967 | Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
|
---|
968 | platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
|
---|
969 | variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
|
---|
970 | may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
|
---|
971 | library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it.
|
---|
972 |
|
---|
973 | @kindex -Bsymbolic
|
---|
974 | @item -Bsymbolic
|
---|
975 | When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
|
---|
976 | definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
|
---|
977 | for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
|
---|
978 | within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
|
---|
979 | platforms which support shared libraries.
|
---|
980 |
|
---|
981 | @kindex --check-sections
|
---|
982 | @kindex --no-check-sections
|
---|
983 | @item --check-sections
|
---|
984 | @itemx --no-check-sections
|
---|
985 | Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
|
---|
986 | been assigned to see if there any overlaps. Normally the linker will
|
---|
987 | perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
|
---|
988 | suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
|
---|
989 | allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
|
---|
990 | restored by using the command line switch @samp{--check-sections}.
|
---|
991 |
|
---|
992 | @cindex cross reference table
|
---|
993 | @kindex --cref
|
---|
994 | @item --cref
|
---|
995 | Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
|
---|
996 | generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
|
---|
997 | Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
|
---|
998 |
|
---|
999 | The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
|
---|
1000 | easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
|
---|
1001 | sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
|
---|
1002 | symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
|
---|
1003 | definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
|
---|
1004 |
|
---|
1005 | @cindex common allocation
|
---|
1006 | @kindex --no-define-common
|
---|
1007 | @item --no-define-common
|
---|
1008 | This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
|
---|
1009 | The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
|
---|
1010 | @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
|
---|
1011 |
|
---|
1012 | The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
|
---|
1013 | the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
|
---|
1014 | of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
|
---|
1015 | forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
|
---|
1016 | Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
|
---|
1017 | from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
|
---|
1018 | This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
|
---|
1019 | and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
|
---|
1020 | duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
|
---|
1021 | paths for runtime symbol resolution.
|
---|
1022 |
|
---|
1023 | @cindex symbols, from command line
|
---|
1024 | @kindex --defsym @var{symbol}=@var{exp}
|
---|
1025 | @item --defsym @var{symbol}=@var{expression}
|
---|
1026 | Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
|
---|
1027 | address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
|
---|
1028 | times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
|
---|
1029 | limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
|
---|
1030 | context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
|
---|
1031 | symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
|
---|
1032 | constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
|
---|
1033 | using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
|
---|
1034 | Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
|
---|
1035 | space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
|
---|
1036 | @var{expression}.
|
---|
1037 |
|
---|
1038 | @cindex demangling, from command line
|
---|
1039 | @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
|
---|
1040 | @kindex --no-demangle
|
---|
1041 | @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
|
---|
1042 | @itemx --no-demangle
|
---|
1043 | These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
|
---|
1044 | and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
|
---|
1045 | present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
|
---|
1046 | underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
|
---|
1047 | mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
|
---|
1048 | different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
|
---|
1049 | to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
|
---|
1050 | demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
|
---|
1051 | is set. These options may be used to override the default.
|
---|
1052 |
|
---|
1053 | @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
|
---|
1054 | @kindex -I@var{file}
|
---|
1055 | @kindex --dynamic-linker @var{file}
|
---|
1056 | @item --dynamic-linker @var{file}
|
---|
1057 | Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
|
---|
1058 | generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
|
---|
1059 | linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
|
---|
1060 | doing.
|
---|
1061 |
|
---|
1062 | @cindex MIPS embedded PIC code
|
---|
1063 | @kindex --embedded-relocs
|
---|
1064 | @item --embedded-relocs
|
---|
1065 | This option is only meaningful when linking MIPS embedded PIC code,
|
---|
1066 | generated by the -membedded-pic option to the @sc{gnu} compiler and
|
---|
1067 | assembler. It causes the linker to create a table which may be used at
|
---|
1068 | runtime to relocate any data which was statically initialized to pointer
|
---|
1069 | values. See the code in testsuite/ld-empic for details.
|
---|
1070 |
|
---|
1071 |
|
---|
1072 | @kindex --fatal-warnings
|
---|
1073 | @item --fatal-warnings
|
---|
1074 | Treat all warnings as errors.
|
---|
1075 |
|
---|
1076 | @kindex --force-exe-suffix
|
---|
1077 | @item --force-exe-suffix
|
---|
1078 | Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
|
---|
1079 |
|
---|
1080 | If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
|
---|
1081 | @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
|
---|
1082 | the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
|
---|
1083 | option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
|
---|
1084 | Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
|
---|
1085 | it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
|
---|
1086 |
|
---|
1087 | @kindex --gc-sections
|
---|
1088 | @kindex --no-gc-sections
|
---|
1089 | @cindex garbage collection
|
---|
1090 | @item --no-gc-sections
|
---|
1091 | @itemx --gc-sections
|
---|
1092 | Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
|
---|
1093 | targets that do not support this option. This option is not compatible
|
---|
1094 | with @samp{-r}, nor should it be used with dynamic linking. The default
|
---|
1095 | behaviour (of not performing this garbage collection) can be restored by
|
---|
1096 | specifying @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
|
---|
1097 |
|
---|
1098 | @cindex help
|
---|
1099 | @cindex usage
|
---|
1100 | @kindex --help
|
---|
1101 | @item --help
|
---|
1102 | Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
|
---|
1103 |
|
---|
1104 | @kindex --target-help
|
---|
1105 | @item --target-help
|
---|
1106 | Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
|
---|
1107 |
|
---|
1108 | @kindex -Map
|
---|
1109 | @item -Map @var{mapfile}
|
---|
1110 | Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
|
---|
1111 | @samp{-M} option, above.
|
---|
1112 |
|
---|
1113 | @cindex memory usage
|
---|
1114 | @kindex --no-keep-memory
|
---|
1115 | @item --no-keep-memory
|
---|
1116 | @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
|
---|
1117 | symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
|
---|
1118 | instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
|
---|
1119 | necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
|
---|
1120 | while linking a large executable.
|
---|
1121 |
|
---|
1122 | @kindex --no-undefined
|
---|
1123 | @kindex -z defs
|
---|
1124 | @item --no-undefined
|
---|
1125 | @itemx -z defs
|
---|
1126 | Normally when creating a non-symbolic shared library, undefined symbols
|
---|
1127 | are allowed and left to be resolved by the runtime loader. This option
|
---|
1128 | disallows such undefined symbols if they come from regular object
|
---|
1129 | files. The switch @samp{--no-allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
|
---|
1130 | behaviour for shared objects being linked into the shared library.
|
---|
1131 |
|
---|
1132 | @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
|
---|
1133 | @kindex -z muldefs
|
---|
1134 | @item --allow-multiple-definition
|
---|
1135 | @itemx -z muldefs
|
---|
1136 | Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
|
---|
1137 | report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
|
---|
1138 | first definition will be used.
|
---|
1139 |
|
---|
1140 | @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
|
---|
1141 | @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
|
---|
1142 | @item --allow-shlib-undefined
|
---|
1143 | @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
|
---|
1144 | Allow (the default) or disallow undefined symbols in shared objects.
|
---|
1145 | The setting of this switch overrides @samp{--no-undefined} where
|
---|
1146 | shared objects are concerned. Thus if @samp{--no-undefined} is set
|
---|
1147 | but @samp{--no-allow-shlib-undefined} is not, the net result will be
|
---|
1148 | that undefined symbols in regular object files will trigger an error,
|
---|
1149 | but undefined symbols in shared objects will be ignored.
|
---|
1150 |
|
---|
1151 | The reason that @samp{--allow-shlib-undefined} is the default is that
|
---|
1152 | the shared object being specified at link time may not be the same one
|
---|
1153 | that is available at load time, so the symbols might actually be
|
---|
1154 | resolvable at load time. Plus there are some systems, (eg BeOS) where
|
---|
1155 | undefined symbols in shared libraries is normal since the kernel
|
---|
1156 | patches them at load time to select which function is most appropriate
|
---|
1157 | for the current architecture. eg. to dynamically select an appropriate
|
---|
1158 | memset function. Apparently it is also normal for HPPA shared
|
---|
1159 | libraries to have undefined symbols.
|
---|
1160 |
|
---|
1161 | @kindex --no-undefined-version
|
---|
1162 | @item --no-undefined-version
|
---|
1163 | Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
|
---|
1164 | it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
|
---|
1165 | will be issued instead.
|
---|
1166 |
|
---|
1167 | @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
|
---|
1168 | @item --no-warn-mismatch
|
---|
1169 | Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
|
---|
1170 | files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
|
---|
1171 | been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
|
---|
1172 | This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
|
---|
1173 | errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
|
---|
1174 | have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
|
---|
1175 | inappropriate.
|
---|
1176 |
|
---|
1177 | @kindex --no-whole-archive
|
---|
1178 | @item --no-whole-archive
|
---|
1179 | Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
|
---|
1180 | archive files.
|
---|
1181 |
|
---|
1182 | @cindex output file after errors
|
---|
1183 | @kindex --noinhibit-exec
|
---|
1184 | @item --noinhibit-exec
|
---|
1185 | Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
|
---|
1186 | Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
|
---|
1187 | errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
|
---|
1188 | when it issues any error whatsoever.
|
---|
1189 |
|
---|
1190 | @kindex -nostdlib
|
---|
1191 | @item -nostdlib
|
---|
1192 | Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
|
---|
1193 | command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
|
---|
1194 | (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
|
---|
1195 |
|
---|
1196 | @ifclear SingleFormat
|
---|
1197 | @kindex --oformat
|
---|
1198 | @item --oformat @var{output-format}
|
---|
1199 | @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
|
---|
1200 | file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
|
---|
1201 | @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
|
---|
1202 | object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
|
---|
1203 | object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
|
---|
1204 | should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
|
---|
1205 | usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
|
---|
1206 | name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
|
---|
1207 | list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
|
---|
1208 | command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
|
---|
1209 | this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
|
---|
1210 | @end ifclear
|
---|
1211 |
|
---|
1212 | @kindex -qmagic
|
---|
1213 | @item -qmagic
|
---|
1214 | This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
|
---|
1215 |
|
---|
1216 | @kindex -Qy
|
---|
1217 | @item -Qy
|
---|
1218 | This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
|
---|
1219 |
|
---|
1220 | @kindex --relax
|
---|
1221 | @cindex synthesizing linker
|
---|
1222 | @cindex relaxing addressing modes
|
---|
1223 | @item --relax
|
---|
1224 | An option with machine dependent effects.
|
---|
1225 | @ifset GENERIC
|
---|
1226 | This option is only supported on a few targets.
|
---|
1227 | @end ifset
|
---|
1228 | @ifset H8300
|
---|
1229 | @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
|
---|
1230 | @end ifset
|
---|
1231 | @ifset I960
|
---|
1232 | @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
|
---|
1233 | @end ifset
|
---|
1234 | @ifset XTENSA
|
---|
1235 | @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
|
---|
1236 | @end ifset
|
---|
1237 |
|
---|
1238 | On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global
|
---|
1239 | optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
|
---|
1240 | in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
|
---|
1241 | instructions in the output object file.
|
---|
1242 |
|
---|
1243 | On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
|
---|
1244 | debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
|
---|
1245 | @ifset GENERIC
|
---|
1246 | This is known to be
|
---|
1247 | the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors.
|
---|
1248 | @end ifset
|
---|
1249 |
|
---|
1250 | @ifset GENERIC
|
---|
1251 | On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
|
---|
1252 | but ignored.
|
---|
1253 | @end ifset
|
---|
1254 |
|
---|
1255 | @cindex retaining specified symbols
|
---|
1256 | @cindex stripping all but some symbols
|
---|
1257 | @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
|
---|
1258 | @item --retain-symbols-file @var{filename}
|
---|
1259 | Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
|
---|
1260 | discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
|
---|
1261 | symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
|
---|
1262 | @ifset GENERIC
|
---|
1263 | (such as VxWorks)
|
---|
1264 | @end ifset
|
---|
1265 | where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
|
---|
1266 | run-time memory.
|
---|
1267 |
|
---|
1268 | @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
|
---|
1269 | or symbols needed for relocations.
|
---|
1270 |
|
---|
1271 | You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
|
---|
1272 | line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
|
---|
1273 |
|
---|
1274 | @ifset GENERIC
|
---|
1275 | @item -rpath @var{dir}
|
---|
1276 | @cindex runtime library search path
|
---|
1277 | @kindex -rpath
|
---|
1278 | Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
|
---|
1279 | linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
|
---|
1280 | arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
|
---|
1281 | them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
|
---|
1282 | also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
|
---|
1283 | objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
|
---|
1284 | @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
|
---|
1285 | ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
|
---|
1286 | @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
|
---|
1287 |
|
---|
1288 | The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
|
---|
1289 | SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
|
---|
1290 | @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
|
---|
1291 | runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
|
---|
1292 | options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
|
---|
1293 | gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
|
---|
1294 | filesystems.
|
---|
1295 |
|
---|
1296 | For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
|
---|
1297 | followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
|
---|
1298 | the @option{-rpath} option.
|
---|
1299 | @end ifset
|
---|
1300 |
|
---|
1301 | @ifset GENERIC
|
---|
1302 | @cindex link-time runtime library search path
|
---|
1303 | @kindex -rpath-link
|
---|
1304 | @item -rpath-link @var{DIR}
|
---|
1305 | When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
|
---|
1306 | happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
|
---|
1307 | of the input files.
|
---|
1308 |
|
---|
1309 | When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
|
---|
1310 | non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
|
---|
1311 | shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
|
---|
1312 | explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
|
---|
1313 | specifies the first set of directories to search. The
|
---|
1314 | @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
|
---|
1315 | either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
|
---|
1316 | appearing multiple times.
|
---|
1317 |
|
---|
1318 | This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
|
---|
1319 | that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
|
---|
1320 | is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
|
---|
1321 | runtime linker would do.
|
---|
1322 |
|
---|
1323 | The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
|
---|
1324 | libraries.
|
---|
1325 | @enumerate
|
---|
1326 | @item
|
---|
1327 | Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
|
---|
1328 | @item
|
---|
1329 | Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
|
---|
1330 | between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
|
---|
1331 | specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
|
---|
1332 | used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
|
---|
1333 | at link time. It is for the native linker only.
|
---|
1334 | @item
|
---|
1335 | On an ELF system, if the @option{-rpath} and @code{rpath-link} options
|
---|
1336 | were not used, search the contents of the environment variable
|
---|
1337 | @code{LD_RUN_PATH}. It is for the native linker only.
|
---|
1338 | @item
|
---|
1339 | On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
|
---|
1340 | directories specified using @option{-L} options.
|
---|
1341 | @item
|
---|
1342 | For a native linker, the contents of the environment variable
|
---|
1343 | @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
|
---|
1344 | @item
|
---|
1345 | For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
|
---|
1346 | @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
|
---|
1347 | libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
|
---|
1348 | @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
|
---|
1349 | @item
|
---|
1350 | The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
|
---|
1351 | @item
|
---|
1352 | For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
|
---|
1353 | exists, the list of directories found in that file.
|
---|
1354 | @end enumerate
|
---|
1355 |
|
---|
1356 | If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
|
---|
1357 | warning and continue with the link.
|
---|
1358 | @end ifset
|
---|
1359 |
|
---|
1360 | @kindex -shared
|
---|
1361 | @kindex -Bshareable
|
---|
1362 | @item -shared
|
---|
1363 | @itemx -Bshareable
|
---|
1364 | @cindex shared libraries
|
---|
1365 | Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
|
---|
1366 | and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
|
---|
1367 | shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
|
---|
1368 | undefined symbols in the link.
|
---|
1369 |
|
---|
1370 | @item --sort-common
|
---|
1371 | @kindex --sort-common
|
---|
1372 | This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by size when it
|
---|
1373 | places them in the appropriate output sections. First come all the one
|
---|
1374 | byte symbols, then all the two byte, then all the four byte, and then
|
---|
1375 | everything else. This is to prevent gaps between symbols due to
|
---|
1376 | alignment constraints.
|
---|
1377 |
|
---|
1378 | @kindex --split-by-file
|
---|
1379 | @item --split-by-file [@var{size}]
|
---|
1380 | Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
|
---|
1381 | each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
|
---|
1382 | size of 1 if not given.
|
---|
1383 |
|
---|
1384 | @kindex --split-by-reloc
|
---|
1385 | @item --split-by-reloc [@var{count}]
|
---|
1386 | Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
|
---|
1387 | output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
|
---|
1388 | This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
|
---|
1389 | certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
|
---|
1390 | cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
|
---|
1391 | that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
|
---|
1392 | support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
|
---|
1393 | input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
|
---|
1394 | more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
|
---|
1395 | many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
|
---|
1396 |
|
---|
1397 | @kindex --stats
|
---|
1398 | @item --stats
|
---|
1399 | Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
|
---|
1400 | as execution time and memory usage.
|
---|
1401 |
|
---|
1402 | @kindex --traditional-format
|
---|
1403 | @cindex traditional format
|
---|
1404 | @item --traditional-format
|
---|
1405 | For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
|
---|
1406 | the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
|
---|
1407 | use the traditional format instead.
|
---|
1408 |
|
---|
1409 | @cindex dbx
|
---|
1410 | For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
|
---|
1411 | symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
|
---|
1412 | full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
|
---|
1413 | @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
|
---|
1414 | trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
|
---|
1415 | combine duplicate entries.
|
---|
1416 |
|
---|
1417 | @kindex --section-start @var{sectionname}=@var{org}
|
---|
1418 | @item --section-start @var{sectionname}=@var{org}
|
---|
1419 | Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
|
---|
1420 | address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
|
---|
1421 | times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
|
---|
1422 | line.
|
---|
1423 | @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
|
---|
1424 | for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
|
---|
1425 | @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
|
---|
1426 | should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
|
---|
1427 | sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
|
---|
1428 |
|
---|
1429 | @kindex -Tbss @var{org}
|
---|
1430 | @kindex -Tdata @var{org}
|
---|
1431 | @kindex -Ttext @var{org}
|
---|
1432 | @cindex segment origins, cmd line
|
---|
1433 | @item -Tbss @var{org}
|
---|
1434 | @itemx -Tdata @var{org}
|
---|
1435 | @itemx -Ttext @var{org}
|
---|
1436 | Same as --section-start, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
|
---|
1437 | @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
|
---|
1438 |
|
---|
1439 | @kindex --verbose
|
---|
1440 | @cindex verbose
|
---|
1441 | @item --dll-verbose
|
---|
1442 | @itemx --verbose
|
---|
1443 | Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
|
---|
1444 | supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
|
---|
1445 | the linker script being used by the linker.
|
---|
1446 |
|
---|
1447 | @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
|
---|
1448 | @cindex version script, symbol versions
|
---|
1449 | @itemx --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
|
---|
1450 | Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
|
---|
1451 | used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
|
---|
1452 | about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
|
---|
1453 | is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
|
---|
1454 | @xref{VERSION}.
|
---|
1455 |
|
---|
1456 | @kindex --warn-common
|
---|
1457 | @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
|
---|
1458 | @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
|
---|
1459 | @item --warn-common
|
---|
1460 | Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
|
---|
1461 | a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
|
---|
1462 | but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
|
---|
1463 | you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
|
---|
1464 | Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
|
---|
1465 | warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
|
---|
1466 |
|
---|
1467 | There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
|
---|
1468 |
|
---|
1469 | @table @samp
|
---|
1470 | @item int i = 1;
|
---|
1471 | A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
|
---|
1472 | file.
|
---|
1473 |
|
---|
1474 | @item extern int i;
|
---|
1475 | An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
|
---|
1476 | There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
|
---|
1477 | variable somewhere.
|
---|
1478 |
|
---|
1479 | @item int i;
|
---|
1480 | A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
|
---|
1481 | variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
|
---|
1482 | The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
|
---|
1483 | single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
|
---|
1484 | size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
|
---|
1485 | a definition of the same variable.
|
---|
1486 | @end table
|
---|
1487 |
|
---|
1488 | The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
|
---|
1489 | Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
|
---|
1490 | just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
|
---|
1491 | encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
|
---|
1492 | a common symbol.
|
---|
1493 |
|
---|
1494 | @enumerate
|
---|
1495 | @item
|
---|
1496 | Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
|
---|
1497 | definition for the symbol.
|
---|
1498 | @smallexample
|
---|
1499 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
|
---|
1500 | overridden by definition
|
---|
1501 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
|
---|
1502 | @end smallexample
|
---|
1503 |
|
---|
1504 | @item
|
---|
1505 | Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
|
---|
1506 | the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
|
---|
1507 | except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
|
---|
1508 | @smallexample
|
---|
1509 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
|
---|
1510 | overriding common
|
---|
1511 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
|
---|
1512 | @end smallexample
|
---|
1513 |
|
---|
1514 | @item
|
---|
1515 | Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
|
---|
1516 | @smallexample
|
---|
1517 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
|
---|
1518 | of `@var{symbol}'
|
---|
1519 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
|
---|
1520 | @end smallexample
|
---|
1521 |
|
---|
1522 | @item
|
---|
1523 | Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
|
---|
1524 | @smallexample
|
---|
1525 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
|
---|
1526 | overridden by larger common
|
---|
1527 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
|
---|
1528 | @end smallexample
|
---|
1529 |
|
---|
1530 | @item
|
---|
1531 | Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
|
---|
1532 | the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
|
---|
1533 | encountered in a different order.
|
---|
1534 | @smallexample
|
---|
1535 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
|
---|
1536 | overriding smaller common
|
---|
1537 | @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
|
---|
1538 | @end smallexample
|
---|
1539 | @end enumerate
|
---|
1540 |
|
---|
1541 | @kindex --warn-constructors
|
---|
1542 | @item --warn-constructors
|
---|
1543 | Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
|
---|
1544 | object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
|
---|
1545 | detect the use of global constructors.
|
---|
1546 |
|
---|
1547 | @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
|
---|
1548 | @item --warn-multiple-gp
|
---|
1549 | Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
|
---|
1550 | This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
|
---|
1551 | Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
|
---|
1552 | section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
|
---|
1553 | of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
|
---|
1554 | base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
|
---|
1555 | base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
|
---|
1556 | bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
|
---|
1557 | large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
|
---|
1558 | values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
|
---|
1559 | option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
|
---|
1560 |
|
---|
1561 | @kindex --warn-once
|
---|
1562 | @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
|
---|
1563 | @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
|
---|
1564 | @item --warn-once
|
---|
1565 | Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
|
---|
1566 | which refers to it.
|
---|
1567 |
|
---|
1568 | @kindex --warn-section-align
|
---|
1569 | @cindex warnings, on section alignment
|
---|
1570 | @cindex section alignment, warnings on
|
---|
1571 | @item --warn-section-align
|
---|
1572 | Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
|
---|
1573 | alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
|
---|
1574 | The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
|
---|
1575 | is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
|
---|
1576 | the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
|
---|
1577 |
|
---|
1578 | @kindex --whole-archive
|
---|
1579 | @cindex including an entire archive
|
---|
1580 | @item --whole-archive
|
---|
1581 | For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
|
---|
1582 | @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
|
---|
1583 | in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
|
---|
1584 | files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
|
---|
1585 | library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
|
---|
1586 | library. This option may be used more than once.
|
---|
1587 |
|
---|
1588 | Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
|
---|
1589 | about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
|
---|
1590 | Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
|
---|
1591 | list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
|
---|
1592 | your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
|
---|
1593 |
|
---|
1594 | @kindex --wrap
|
---|
1595 | @item --wrap @var{symbol}
|
---|
1596 | Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
|
---|
1597 | @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
|
---|
1598 | undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
|
---|
1599 | @var{symbol}.
|
---|
1600 |
|
---|
1601 | This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
|
---|
1602 | wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
|
---|
1603 | wishes to call the system function, it should call
|
---|
1604 | @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
|
---|
1605 |
|
---|
1606 | Here is a trivial example:
|
---|
1607 |
|
---|
1608 | @smallexample
|
---|
1609 | void *
|
---|
1610 | __wrap_malloc (int c)
|
---|
1611 | @{
|
---|
1612 | printf ("malloc called with %ld\n", c);
|
---|
1613 | return __real_malloc (c);
|
---|
1614 | @}
|
---|
1615 | @end smallexample
|
---|
1616 |
|
---|
1617 | If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
|
---|
1618 | all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
|
---|
1619 | instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
|
---|
1620 | call the real @code{malloc} function.
|
---|
1621 |
|
---|
1622 | You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
|
---|
1623 | links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
|
---|
1624 | you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
|
---|
1625 | file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
|
---|
1626 | call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
|
---|
1627 |
|
---|
1628 | @kindex --enable-new-dtags
|
---|
1629 | @kindex --disable-new-dtags
|
---|
1630 | @item --enable-new-dtags
|
---|
1631 | @itemx --disable-new-dtags
|
---|
1632 | This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
|
---|
1633 | systems may not understand them. If you specify
|
---|
1634 | @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
|
---|
1635 | If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
|
---|
1636 | created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
|
---|
1637 | those options are only available for ELF systems.
|
---|
1638 |
|
---|
1639 | @end table
|
---|
1640 |
|
---|
1641 | @c man end
|
---|
1642 |
|
---|
1643 | @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
|
---|
1644 |
|
---|
1645 | @c man begin OPTIONS
|
---|
1646 |
|
---|
1647 | The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
|
---|
1648 | the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
|
---|
1649 | normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
|
---|
1650 | use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
|
---|
1651 | @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
|
---|
1652 | like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
|
---|
1653 | symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
|
---|
1654 | object file).
|
---|
1655 |
|
---|
1656 | In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
|
---|
1657 | support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
|
---|
1658 | PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
|
---|
1659 | values by either a space or an equals sign.
|
---|
1660 |
|
---|
1661 | @table @gcctabopt
|
---|
1662 |
|
---|
1663 | @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
|
---|
1664 | @item --add-stdcall-alias
|
---|
1665 | If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
|
---|
1666 | as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
|
---|
1667 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1668 |
|
---|
1669 | @kindex --base-file
|
---|
1670 | @item --base-file @var{file}
|
---|
1671 | Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
|
---|
1672 | addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
|
---|
1673 | @file{dlltool}.
|
---|
1674 | [This is an i386 PE specific option]
|
---|
1675 |
|
---|
1676 | @kindex --dll
|
---|
1677 | @item --dll
|
---|
1678 | Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
|
---|
1679 | @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
|
---|
1680 | file.
|
---|
1681 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1682 |
|
---|
1683 | @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
|
---|
1684 | @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
|
---|
1685 | @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
|
---|
1686 | @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
|
---|
1687 | If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
|
---|
1688 | do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
|
---|
1689 | only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
|
---|
1690 | resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
|
---|
1691 | undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
|
---|
1692 | @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
|
---|
1693 | to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
|
---|
1694 | warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
|
---|
1695 | import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
|
---|
1696 | to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
|
---|
1697 | feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
|
---|
1698 | @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
|
---|
1699 | mismatches are considered to be errors.
|
---|
1700 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1701 |
|
---|
1702 | @cindex DLLs, creating
|
---|
1703 | @kindex --export-all-symbols
|
---|
1704 | @item --export-all-symbols
|
---|
1705 | If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
|
---|
1706 | be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
|
---|
1707 | otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
|
---|
1708 | explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
|
---|
1709 | attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
|
---|
1710 | option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
|
---|
1711 | @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
|
---|
1712 | @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
|
---|
1713 | exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
|
---|
1714 | re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
|
---|
1715 | such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
|
---|
1716 | @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
|
---|
1717 | @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
|
---|
1718 | Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
|
---|
1719 | not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
|
---|
1720 | extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
|
---|
1721 | (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
|
---|
1722 | These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
|
---|
1723 | @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
|
---|
1724 | @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
|
---|
1725 | @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
|
---|
1726 | @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
|
---|
1727 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1728 |
|
---|
1729 | @kindex --exclude-symbols
|
---|
1730 | @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
|
---|
1731 | Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
|
---|
1732 | exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
|
---|
1733 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1734 |
|
---|
1735 | @kindex --exclude-libs
|
---|
1736 | @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
|
---|
1737 | Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
|
---|
1738 | exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
|
---|
1739 | @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
|
---|
1740 | automatic export. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
|
---|
1741 | regardless of this option.
|
---|
1742 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1743 |
|
---|
1744 | @kindex --file-alignment
|
---|
1745 | @item --file-alignment
|
---|
1746 | Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
|
---|
1747 | file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
|
---|
1748 | 512.
|
---|
1749 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1750 |
|
---|
1751 | @cindex heap size
|
---|
1752 | @kindex --heap
|
---|
1753 | @item --heap @var{reserve}
|
---|
1754 | @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
|
---|
1755 | Specify the amount of memory to reserve (and optionally commit) to be
|
---|
1756 | used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
|
---|
1757 | committed.
|
---|
1758 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1759 |
|
---|
1760 | @cindex image base
|
---|
1761 | @kindex --image-base
|
---|
1762 | @item --image-base @var{value}
|
---|
1763 | Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
|
---|
1764 | the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
|
---|
1765 | is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
|
---|
1766 | your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
|
---|
1767 | other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
|
---|
1768 | for dlls.
|
---|
1769 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1770 |
|
---|
1771 | @kindex --kill-at
|
---|
1772 | @item --kill-at
|
---|
1773 | If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
|
---|
1774 | symbols before they are exported.
|
---|
1775 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1776 |
|
---|
1777 | @kindex --major-image-version
|
---|
1778 | @item --major-image-version @var{value}
|
---|
1779 | Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
|
---|
1780 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1781 |
|
---|
1782 | @kindex --major-os-version
|
---|
1783 | @item --major-os-version @var{value}
|
---|
1784 | Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
|
---|
1785 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1786 |
|
---|
1787 | @kindex --major-subsystem-version
|
---|
1788 | @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
|
---|
1789 | Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
|
---|
1790 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1791 |
|
---|
1792 | @kindex --minor-image-version
|
---|
1793 | @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
|
---|
1794 | Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
|
---|
1795 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1796 |
|
---|
1797 | @kindex --minor-os-version
|
---|
1798 | @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
|
---|
1799 | Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
|
---|
1800 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1801 |
|
---|
1802 | @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
|
---|
1803 | @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
|
---|
1804 | Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
|
---|
1805 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1806 |
|
---|
1807 | @cindex DEF files, creating
|
---|
1808 | @cindex DLLs, creating
|
---|
1809 | @kindex --output-def
|
---|
1810 | @item --output-def @var{file}
|
---|
1811 | The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
|
---|
1812 | file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
|
---|
1813 | (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
|
---|
1814 | library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
|
---|
1815 | automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
|
---|
1816 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1817 |
|
---|
1818 | @cindex DLLs, creating
|
---|
1819 | @kindex --out-implib
|
---|
1820 | @item --out-implib @var{file}
|
---|
1821 | The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
|
---|
1822 | import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
|
---|
1823 | import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
|
---|
1824 | may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behavior
|
---|
1825 | makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
|
---|
1826 | creation step.
|
---|
1827 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1828 |
|
---|
1829 | @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
|
---|
1830 | @item --enable-auto-image-base
|
---|
1831 | Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
|
---|
1832 | using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
|
---|
1833 | from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
|
---|
1834 | collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
|
---|
1835 | avoided.
|
---|
1836 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1837 |
|
---|
1838 | @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
|
---|
1839 | @item --disable-auto-image-base
|
---|
1840 | Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
|
---|
1841 | user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
|
---|
1842 | default.
|
---|
1843 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1844 |
|
---|
1845 | @cindex DLLs, linking to
|
---|
1846 | @kindex --dll-search-prefix
|
---|
1847 | @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
|
---|
1848 | When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
|
---|
1849 | search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
|
---|
1850 | @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behavior allows easy distinction
|
---|
1851 | between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
|
---|
1852 | uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
|
---|
1853 | @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
|
---|
1854 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1855 |
|
---|
1856 | @kindex --enable-auto-import
|
---|
1857 | @item --enable-auto-import
|
---|
1858 | Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
|
---|
1859 | DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
|
---|
1860 | building the import libraries with those DATA exports. This generally
|
---|
1861 | will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may see this message:
|
---|
1862 |
|
---|
1863 | "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
|
---|
1864 | documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
|
---|
1865 |
|
---|
1866 | This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
|
---|
1867 | ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
|
---|
1868 | allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
|
---|
1869 | fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
|
---|
1870 | constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
|
---|
1871 | multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
|
---|
1872 | this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
|
---|
1873 | of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
|
---|
1874 | the warning, and exit.
|
---|
1875 |
|
---|
1876 | There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
|
---|
1877 | data type of the exported variable:
|
---|
1878 |
|
---|
1879 | One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
|
---|
1880 | of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
|
---|
1881 | this method works only when runtime environtment supports this feature.
|
---|
1882 |
|
---|
1883 | A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
|
---|
1884 | that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
|
---|
1885 | there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
|
---|
1886 | a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
|
---|
1887 |
|
---|
1888 | @example
|
---|
1889 | extern type extern_array[];
|
---|
1890 | extern_array[1] -->
|
---|
1891 | @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
|
---|
1892 | @end example
|
---|
1893 |
|
---|
1894 | or
|
---|
1895 |
|
---|
1896 | @example
|
---|
1897 | extern type extern_array[];
|
---|
1898 | extern_array[1] -->
|
---|
1899 | @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
|
---|
1900 | @end example
|
---|
1901 |
|
---|
1902 | For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
|
---|
1903 | is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
|
---|
1904 |
|
---|
1905 | @example
|
---|
1906 | extern struct s extern_struct;
|
---|
1907 | extern_struct.field -->
|
---|
1908 | @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
|
---|
1909 | @end example
|
---|
1910 |
|
---|
1911 | or
|
---|
1912 |
|
---|
1913 | @example
|
---|
1914 | extern long long extern_ll;
|
---|
1915 | extern_ll -->
|
---|
1916 | @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
|
---|
1917 | @end example
|
---|
1918 |
|
---|
1919 | A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
|
---|
1920 | 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
|
---|
1921 | @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
|
---|
1922 | requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
|
---|
1923 | building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
|
---|
1924 | merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
|
---|
1925 | between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
|
---|
1926 | constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
|
---|
1927 |
|
---|
1928 | Original:
|
---|
1929 | @example
|
---|
1930 | --foo.h
|
---|
1931 | extern int arr[];
|
---|
1932 | --foo.c
|
---|
1933 | #include "foo.h"
|
---|
1934 | void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
|
---|
1935 | printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
|
---|
1936 | @}
|
---|
1937 | @end example
|
---|
1938 |
|
---|
1939 | Solution 1:
|
---|
1940 | @example
|
---|
1941 | --foo.h
|
---|
1942 | extern int arr[];
|
---|
1943 | --foo.c
|
---|
1944 | #include "foo.h"
|
---|
1945 | void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
|
---|
1946 | /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
|
---|
1947 | volatile int *parr = arr;
|
---|
1948 | printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
|
---|
1949 | @}
|
---|
1950 | @end example
|
---|
1951 |
|
---|
1952 | Solution 2:
|
---|
1953 | @example
|
---|
1954 | --foo.h
|
---|
1955 | /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
|
---|
1956 | #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
|
---|
1957 | !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
|
---|
1958 | #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
|
---|
1959 | #else
|
---|
1960 | #define FOO_IMPORT
|
---|
1961 | #endif
|
---|
1962 | extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
|
---|
1963 | --foo.c
|
---|
1964 | #include "foo.h"
|
---|
1965 | void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
|
---|
1966 | printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
|
---|
1967 | @}
|
---|
1968 | @end example
|
---|
1969 |
|
---|
1970 | A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
|
---|
1971 | library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
|
---|
1972 | for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
|
---|
1973 | functions).
|
---|
1974 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1975 |
|
---|
1976 | @kindex --disable-auto-import
|
---|
1977 | @item --disable-auto-import
|
---|
1978 | Do not attempt to do sophisticalted linking of @code{_symbol} to
|
---|
1979 | @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
|
---|
1980 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1981 |
|
---|
1982 | @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
|
---|
1983 | @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
|
---|
1984 | If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
|
---|
1985 | that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
|
---|
1986 | a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
|
---|
1987 | environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
|
---|
1988 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1989 |
|
---|
1990 | @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
|
---|
1991 | @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
|
---|
1992 | Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
|
---|
1993 | DLLs. This is the default.
|
---|
1994 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
1995 |
|
---|
1996 | @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
|
---|
1997 | @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
|
---|
1998 | Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
|
---|
1999 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
2000 |
|
---|
2001 | @kindex --section-alignment
|
---|
2002 | @item --section-alignment
|
---|
2003 | Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
|
---|
2004 | addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
|
---|
2005 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
2006 |
|
---|
2007 | @cindex stack size
|
---|
2008 | @kindex --stack
|
---|
2009 | @item --stack @var{reserve}
|
---|
2010 | @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
|
---|
2011 | Specify the amount of memory to reserve (and optionally commit) to be
|
---|
2012 | used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
|
---|
2013 | committed.
|
---|
2014 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
2015 |
|
---|
2016 | @kindex --subsystem
|
---|
2017 | @item --subsystem @var{which}
|
---|
2018 | @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
|
---|
2019 | @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
|
---|
2020 | Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
|
---|
2021 | legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
|
---|
2022 | @code{console}, and @code{posix}. You may optionally set the
|
---|
2023 | subsystem version also.
|
---|
2024 | [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
---|
2025 |
|
---|
2026 | @end table
|
---|
2027 |
|
---|
2028 | @c man end
|
---|
2029 |
|
---|
2030 | @ifset UsesEnvVars
|
---|
2031 | @node Environment
|
---|
2032 | @section Environment Variables
|
---|
2033 |
|
---|
2034 | @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
|
---|
2035 |
|
---|
2036 | You can change the behavior of @command{ld} with the environment variables
|
---|
2037 | @ifclear SingleFormat
|
---|
2038 | @code{GNUTARGET},
|
---|
2039 | @end ifclear
|
---|
2040 | @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
|
---|
2041 |
|
---|
2042 | @ifclear SingleFormat
|
---|
2043 | @kindex GNUTARGET
|
---|
2044 | @cindex default input format
|
---|
2045 | @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
|
---|
2046 | use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
|
---|
2047 | of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
|
---|
2048 | @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
|
---|
2049 | of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
|
---|
2050 | attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
|
---|
2051 | this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
|
---|
2052 | there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
|
---|
2053 | object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
|
---|
2054 | BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
|
---|
2055 | in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
|
---|
2056 | @end ifclear
|
---|
2057 |
|
---|
2058 | @kindex LDEMULATION
|
---|
2059 | @cindex default emulation
|
---|
2060 | @cindex emulation, default
|
---|
2061 | @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
|
---|
2062 | @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
|
---|
2063 | behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
|
---|
2064 | available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
|
---|
2065 | the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
|
---|
2066 | variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
|
---|
2067 | linker was configured.
|
---|
2068 |
|
---|
2069 | @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
|
---|
2070 | @cindex demangling, default
|
---|
2071 | Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
|
---|
2072 | @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
|
---|
2073 | default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
|
---|
2074 | a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
|
---|
2075 | may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
|
---|
2076 | options.
|
---|
2077 |
|
---|
2078 | @c man end
|
---|
2079 | @end ifset
|
---|
2080 |
|
---|
2081 | @node Scripts
|
---|
2082 | @chapter Linker Scripts
|
---|
2083 |
|
---|
2084 | @cindex scripts
|
---|
2085 | @cindex linker scripts
|
---|
2086 | @cindex command files
|
---|
2087 | Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
|
---|
2088 | written in the linker command language.
|
---|
2089 |
|
---|
2090 | The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
|
---|
2091 | the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
|
---|
2092 | the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
|
---|
2093 | more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
|
---|
2094 | direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
|
---|
2095 | described below.
|
---|
2096 |
|
---|
2097 | The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
|
---|
2098 | yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
|
---|
2099 | linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
|
---|
2100 | to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
|
---|
2101 | such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
|
---|
2102 |
|
---|
2103 | You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
|
---|
2104 | line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
|
---|
2105 | default linker script.
|
---|
2106 |
|
---|
2107 | You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
|
---|
2108 | to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
|
---|
2109 | Linker Scripts}.
|
---|
2110 |
|
---|
2111 | @menu
|
---|
2112 | * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
|
---|
2113 | * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
|
---|
2114 | * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
|
---|
2115 | * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
|
---|
2116 | * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
|
---|
2117 | * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
|
---|
2118 | * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
|
---|
2119 | * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
|
---|
2120 | * VERSION:: VERSION Command
|
---|
2121 | * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
|
---|
2122 | * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
|
---|
2123 | @end menu
|
---|
2124 |
|
---|
2125 | @node Basic Script Concepts
|
---|
2126 | @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
|
---|
2127 | @cindex linker script concepts
|
---|
2128 | We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
|
---|
2129 | describe the linker script language.
|
---|
2130 |
|
---|
2131 | The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
|
---|
2132 | file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
|
---|
2133 | @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
|
---|
2134 | The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
|
---|
2135 | purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
|
---|
2136 | among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
|
---|
2137 | section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
|
---|
2138 | in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
|
---|
2139 |
|
---|
2140 | Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
|
---|
2141 | also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
|
---|
2142 | contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
|
---|
2143 | the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
|
---|
2144 | A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
|
---|
2145 | area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
|
---|
2146 | loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
|
---|
2147 | which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
|
---|
2148 | of debugging information.
|
---|
2149 |
|
---|
2150 | Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
|
---|
2151 | first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
|
---|
2152 | the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
|
---|
2153 | @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
|
---|
2154 | section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
|
---|
2155 | same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
|
---|
2156 | is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
|
---|
2157 | (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
|
---|
2158 | based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
|
---|
2159 | RAM address would be the VMA.
|
---|
2160 |
|
---|
2161 | You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
|
---|
2162 | program with the @samp{-h} option.
|
---|
2163 |
|
---|
2164 | Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
|
---|
2165 | @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
|
---|
2166 | has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
|
---|
2167 | information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
|
---|
2168 | will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
|
---|
2169 | static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
|
---|
2170 | referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
|
---|
2171 |
|
---|
2172 | You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
|
---|
2173 | program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
|
---|
2174 | option.
|
---|
2175 |
|
---|
2176 | @node Script Format
|
---|
2177 | @section Linker Script Format
|
---|
2178 | @cindex linker script format
|
---|
2179 | Linker scripts are text files.
|
---|
2180 |
|
---|
2181 | You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
|
---|
2182 | either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
|
---|
2183 | symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
|
---|
2184 | generally ignored.
|
---|
2185 |
|
---|
2186 | Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
|
---|
2187 | If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
|
---|
2188 | otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
|
---|
2189 | double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
|
---|
2190 | file name.
|
---|
2191 |
|
---|
2192 | You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
|
---|
2193 | @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
|
---|
2194 | to whitespace.
|
---|
2195 |
|
---|
2196 | @node Simple Example
|
---|
2197 | @section Simple Linker Script Example
|
---|
2198 | @cindex linker script example
|
---|
2199 | @cindex example of linker script
|
---|
2200 | Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
|
---|
2201 |
|
---|
2202 | The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
|
---|
2203 | @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
|
---|
2204 | memory layout of the output file.
|
---|
2205 |
|
---|
2206 | The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
|
---|
2207 | describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
|
---|
2208 | code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
|
---|
2209 | @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
|
---|
2210 | Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
|
---|
2211 | your input files.
|
---|
2212 |
|
---|
2213 | For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
|
---|
2214 | 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
|
---|
2215 | linker script which will do that:
|
---|
2216 | @smallexample
|
---|
2217 | SECTIONS
|
---|
2218 | @{
|
---|
2219 | . = 0x10000;
|
---|
2220 | .text : @{ *(.text) @}
|
---|
2221 | . = 0x8000000;
|
---|
2222 | .data : @{ *(.data) @}
|
---|
2223 | .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
|
---|
2224 | @}
|
---|
2225 | @end smallexample
|
---|
2226 |
|
---|
2227 | You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
|
---|
2228 | followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
|
---|
2229 | descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
|
---|
2230 |
|
---|
2231 | The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
|
---|
2232 | sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
|
---|
2233 | counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
|
---|
2234 | other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
|
---|
2235 | current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
|
---|
2236 | incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
|
---|
2237 | @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
|
---|
2238 |
|
---|
2239 | The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
|
---|
2240 | required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
|
---|
2241 | after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
|
---|
2242 | which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
|
---|
2243 | wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
|
---|
2244 | means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
|
---|
2245 |
|
---|
2246 | Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
|
---|
2247 | @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
|
---|
2248 | @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
|
---|
2249 |
|
---|
2250 | The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
|
---|
2251 | the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
|
---|
2252 | at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
|
---|
2253 | output section, the value of the location counter will be
|
---|
2254 | @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
|
---|
2255 | effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
|
---|
2256 | immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory
|
---|
2257 |
|
---|
2258 | The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
|
---|
2259 | alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
|
---|
2260 | example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
|
---|
2261 | sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
|
---|
2262 | may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
|
---|
2263 | sections.
|
---|
2264 |
|
---|
2265 | That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
|
---|
2266 |
|
---|
2267 | @node Simple Commands
|
---|
2268 | @section Simple Linker Script Commands
|
---|
2269 | @cindex linker script simple commands
|
---|
2270 | In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
|
---|
2271 |
|
---|
2272 | @menu
|
---|
2273 | * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
|
---|
2274 | * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
|
---|
2275 | @ifclear SingleFormat
|
---|
2276 | * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
|
---|
2277 | @end ifclear
|
---|
2278 |
|
---|
2279 | * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
|
---|
2280 | @end menu
|
---|
2281 |
|
---|
2282 | @node Entry Point
|
---|
2283 | @subsection Setting the Entry Point
|
---|
2284 | @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
|
---|
2285 | @cindex start of execution
|
---|
2286 | @cindex first instruction
|
---|
2287 | @cindex entry point
|
---|
2288 | The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
|
---|
2289 | point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
|
---|
2290 | entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
|
---|
2291 | @smallexample
|
---|
2292 | ENTRY(@var{symbol})
|
---|
2293 | @end smallexample
|
---|
2294 |
|
---|
2295 | There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
|
---|
2296 | entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
|
---|
2297 | stopping when one of them succeeds:
|
---|
2298 | @itemize @bullet
|
---|
2299 | @item
|
---|
2300 | the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
|
---|
2301 | @item
|
---|
2302 | the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
|
---|
2303 | @item
|
---|
2304 | the value of the symbol @code{start}, if defined;
|
---|
2305 | @item
|
---|
2306 | the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
|
---|
2307 | @item
|
---|
2308 | The address @code{0}.
|
---|
2309 | @end itemize
|
---|
2310 |
|
---|
2311 | @node File Commands
|
---|
2312 | @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
|
---|
2313 | @cindex linker script file commands
|
---|
2314 | Several linker script commands deal with files.
|
---|
2315 |
|
---|
2316 | @table @code
|
---|
2317 | @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
|
---|
2318 | @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
|
---|
2319 | @cindex including a linker script
|
---|
2320 | Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
|
---|
2321 | be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
|
---|
2322 | with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
|
---|
2323 | 10 levels deep.
|
---|
2324 |
|
---|
2325 | @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
|
---|
2326 | @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
|
---|
2327 | @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
|
---|
2328 | @cindex input files in linker scripts
|
---|
2329 | @cindex input object files in linker scripts
|
---|
2330 | @cindex linker script input object files
|
---|
2331 | The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
|
---|
2332 | in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
|
---|
2333 |
|
---|
2334 | For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
|
---|
2335 | a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
|
---|
2336 | then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
|
---|
2337 |
|
---|
2338 | In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
|
---|
2339 | script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
|
---|
2340 |
|
---|
2341 | In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
|
---|
2342 | with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
|
---|
2343 | located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
|
---|
2344 | for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
|
---|
2345 | open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
|
---|
2346 | linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
|
---|
2347 | description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
|
---|
2348 |
|
---|
2349 | If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
|
---|
2350 | name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
|
---|
2351 | @samp{-l}.
|
---|
2352 |
|
---|
2353 | When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
|
---|
2354 | files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
|
---|
2355 | script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
|
---|
2356 |
|
---|
2357 | @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
|
---|
2358 | @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
|
---|
2359 | @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
|
---|
2360 | @cindex grouping input files
|
---|
2361 | The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
|
---|
2362 | files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
|
---|
2363 | new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
|
---|
2364 | in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
|
---|
2365 |
|
---|
2366 | @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
|
---|
2367 | @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
|
---|
2368 | @cindex output file name in linker scripot
|
---|
2369 | The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
|
---|
2370 | @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
|
---|
2371 | @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
|
---|
2372 | Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
|
---|
2373 | precedence.
|
---|
2374 |
|
---|
2375 | You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
|
---|
2376 | output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
|
---|
2377 |
|
---|
2378 | @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
|
---|
2379 | @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
|
---|
2380 | @cindex library search path in linker script
|
---|
2381 | @cindex archive search path in linker script
|
---|
2382 | @cindex search path in linker script
|
---|
2383 | The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
|
---|
2384 | @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
|
---|
2385 | @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
|
---|
2386 | on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
|
---|
2387 | are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
|
---|
2388 | the command line option are searched first.
|
---|
2389 |
|
---|
2390 | @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
|
---|
2391 | @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
|
---|
2392 | @cindex first input file
|
---|
2393 | The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
|
---|
2394 | that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
|
---|
2395 | though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
|
---|
2396 | when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
|
---|
2397 | first file.
|
---|
2398 | @end table
|
---|
2399 |
|
---|
2400 | @ifclear SingleFormat
|
---|
2401 | @node Format Commands
|
---|
2402 | @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
|
---|
2403 | A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
|
---|
2404 |
|
---|
2405 | @table @code
|
---|
2406 | @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
|
---|
2407 | @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
|
---|
2408 | @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
|
---|
2409 | @cindex output file format in linker script
|
---|
2410 | The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
|
---|
2411 | output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
|
---|
2412 | exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
|
---|
2413 | (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
|
---|
2414 | line option takes precedence.
|
---|
2415 |
|
---|
2416 | You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
|
---|
2417 | formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
|
---|
2418 | This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
|
---|
2419 | desired endianness.
|
---|
2420 |
|
---|
2421 | If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
|
---|
2422 | will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
|
---|
2423 | output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
|
---|
2424 | used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
|
---|
2425 |
|
---|
2426 | For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
|
---|
2427 | command:
|
---|
2428 | @smallexample
|
---|
2429 | OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
|
---|
2430 | @end smallexample
|
---|
2431 | This says that the default format for the output file is
|
---|
2432 | @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
|
---|
2433 | option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
|
---|
2434 | format.
|
---|
2435 |
|
---|
2436 | @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
|
---|
2437 | @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
|
---|
2438 | @cindex input file format in linker script
|
---|
2439 | The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
|
---|
2440 | files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
|
---|
2441 | This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
|
---|
2442 | (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
|
---|
2443 | is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
|
---|
2444 | command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
|
---|
2445 | @end table
|
---|
2446 | @end ifclear
|
---|
2447 |
|
---|
2448 | @node Miscellaneous Commands
|
---|
2449 | @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
|
---|
2450 | There are a few other linker scripts commands.
|
---|
2451 |
|
---|
2452 | @table @code
|
---|
2453 | @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
|
---|
2454 | @kindex ASSERT
|
---|
2455 | @cindex assertion in linker script
|
---|
2456 | Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
|
---|
2457 | with an error code, and print @var{message}.
|
---|
2458 |
|
---|
2459 | @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
|
---|
2460 | @kindex EXTERN
|
---|
2461 | @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
|
---|
2462 | Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
|
---|
2463 | symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
|
---|
2464 | modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
|
---|
2465 | each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
|
---|
2466 | command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
|
---|
2467 |
|
---|
2468 | @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
|
---|
2469 | @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
|
---|
2470 | @cindex common allocation in linker script
|
---|
2471 | This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
|
---|
2472 | to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
|
---|
2473 | output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
|
---|
2474 |
|
---|
2475 | @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
|
---|
2476 | @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
|
---|
2477 | @cindex common allocation in linker script
|
---|
2478 | This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
|
---|
2479 | command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
|
---|
2480 | to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
|
---|
2481 |
|
---|
2482 | @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
|
---|
2483 | @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
|
---|
2484 | @cindex cross references
|
---|
2485 | This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
|
---|
2486 | references among certain output sections.
|
---|
2487 |
|
---|
2488 | In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
|
---|
2489 | using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
|
---|
2490 | will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
|
---|
2491 | errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
|
---|
2492 | a function defined in the other section.
|
---|
2493 |
|
---|
2494 | The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
|
---|
2495 | @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
|
---|
2496 | an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
|
---|
2497 | @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
|
---|
2498 | names.
|
---|
2499 |
|
---|
2500 | @ifclear SingleFormat
|
---|
2501 | @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
|
---|
2502 | @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
|
---|
2503 | @cindex machine architecture
|
---|
2504 | @cindex architecture
|
---|
2505 | Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
|
---|
2506 | of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
|
---|
2507 | architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
|
---|
2508 | the @samp{-f} option.
|
---|
2509 | @end ifclear
|
---|
2510 | @end table
|
---|
2511 |
|
---|
2512 | @node Assignments
|
---|
2513 | @section Assigning Values to Symbols
|
---|
2514 | @cindex assignment in scripts
|
---|
2515 | @cindex symbol definition, scripts
|
---|
2516 | @cindex variables, defining
|
---|
2517 | You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
|
---|
2518 | the symbol as a global symbol.
|
---|
2519 |
|
---|
2520 | @menu
|
---|
2521 | * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
|
---|
2522 | * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
|
---|
2523 | @end menu
|
---|
2524 |
|
---|
2525 | @node Simple Assignments
|
---|
2526 | @subsection Simple Assignments
|
---|
2527 |
|
---|
2528 | You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
|
---|
2529 |
|
---|
2530 | @table @code
|
---|
2531 | @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
|
---|
2532 | @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
|
---|
2533 | @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
|
---|
2534 | @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
|
---|
2535 | @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
|
---|
2536 | @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
|
---|
2537 | @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
|
---|
2538 | @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
|
---|
2539 | @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
|
---|
2540 | @end table
|
---|
2541 |
|
---|
2542 | The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
|
---|
2543 | @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
|
---|
2544 | defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
|
---|
2545 |
|
---|
2546 | The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
|
---|
2547 | may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command.
|
---|
2548 |
|
---|
2549 | The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
|
---|
2550 |
|
---|
2551 | Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
|
---|
2552 |
|
---|
2553 | You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
|
---|
2554 | statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
|
---|
2555 | section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
|
---|
2556 |
|
---|
2557 | The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
|
---|
2558 | expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
|
---|
2559 |
|
---|
2560 | Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
|
---|
2561 | assignments may be used:
|
---|
2562 |
|
---|
2563 | @smallexample
|
---|
2564 | floating_point = 0;
|
---|
2565 | SECTIONS
|
---|
2566 | @{
|
---|
2567 | .text :
|
---|
2568 | @{
|
---|
2569 | *(.text)
|
---|
2570 | _etext = .;
|
---|
2571 | @}
|
---|
2572 | _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
|
---|
2573 | .data : @{ *(.data) @}
|
---|
2574 | @}
|
---|
2575 | @end smallexample
|
---|
2576 | @noindent
|
---|
2577 | In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
|
---|
2578 | zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
|
---|
2579 | the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
|
---|
2580 | defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
|
---|
2581 | upward to a 4 byte boundary.
|
---|
2582 |
|
---|
2583 | @node PROVIDE
|
---|
2584 | @subsection PROVIDE
|
---|
2585 | @cindex PROVIDE
|
---|
2586 | In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
|
---|
2587 | only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
|
---|
2588 | the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
|
---|
2589 | @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
|
---|
2590 | @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
|
---|
2591 | @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
|
---|
2592 | @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
|
---|
2593 | @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
|
---|
2594 |
|
---|
2595 | Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
|
---|
2596 | @smallexample
|
---|
2597 | SECTIONS
|
---|
2598 | @{
|
---|
2599 | .text :
|
---|
2600 | @{
|
---|
2601 | *(.text)
|
---|
2602 | _etext = .;
|
---|
2603 | PROVIDE(etext = .);
|
---|
2604 | @}
|
---|
2605 | @}
|
---|
2606 | @end smallexample
|
---|
2607 |
|
---|
2608 | In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
|
---|
2609 | underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
|
---|
2610 | the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
|
---|
2611 | underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
|
---|
2612 | If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
|
---|
2613 | linker will use the definition in the linker script.
|
---|
2614 |
|
---|
2615 | @node SECTIONS
|
---|
2616 | @section SECTIONS Command
|
---|
2617 | @kindex SECTIONS
|
---|
2618 | The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
|
---|
2619 | into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
|
---|
2620 |
|
---|
2621 | The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
|
---|
2622 | @smallexample
|
---|
2623 | SECTIONS
|
---|
2624 | @{
|
---|
2625 | @var{sections-command}
|
---|
2626 | @var{sections-command}
|
---|
2627 | @dots{}
|
---|
2628 | @}
|
---|
2629 | @end smallexample
|
---|
2630 |
|
---|
2631 | Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
|
---|
2632 |
|
---|
2633 | @itemize @bullet
|
---|
2634 | @item
|
---|
2635 | an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
|
---|
2636 | @item
|
---|
2637 | a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
|
---|
2638 | @item
|
---|
2639 | an output section description
|
---|
2640 | @item
|
---|
2641 | an overlay description
|
---|
2642 | @end itemize
|
---|
2643 |
|
---|
2644 | The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
|
---|
2645 | @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
|
---|
2646 | those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
|
---|
2647 | understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
|
---|
2648 | the layout of the output file.
|
---|
2649 |
|
---|
2650 | Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
|
---|
2651 | below.
|
---|
2652 |
|
---|
2653 | If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
|
---|
2654 | linker will place each input section into an identically named output
|
---|
2655 | section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
|
---|
2656 | input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
|
---|
2657 | example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
|
---|
2658 | in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
|
---|
2659 |
|
---|
2660 | @menu
|
---|
2661 | * Output Section Description:: Output section description
|
---|
2662 | * Output Section Name:: Output section name
|
---|
2663 | * Output Section Address:: Output section address
|
---|
2664 | * Input Section:: Input section description
|
---|
2665 | * Output Section Data:: Output section data
|
---|
2666 | * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
|
---|
2667 | * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
|
---|
2668 | * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
|
---|
2669 | * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
|
---|
2670 | @end menu
|
---|
2671 |
|
---|
2672 | @node Output Section Description
|
---|
2673 | @subsection Output Section Description
|
---|
2674 | The full description of an output section looks like this:
|
---|
2675 | @smallexample
|
---|
2676 | @group
|
---|
2677 | @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] : [AT(@var{lma})]
|
---|
2678 | @{
|
---|
2679 | @var{output-section-command}
|
---|
2680 | @var{output-section-command}
|
---|
2681 | @dots{}
|
---|
2682 | @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
|
---|
2683 | @end group
|
---|
2684 | @end smallexample
|
---|
2685 |
|
---|
2686 | Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
|
---|
2687 |
|
---|
2688 | The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
|
---|
2689 | name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
|
---|
2690 | The line breaks and other white space are optional.
|
---|
2691 |
|
---|
2692 | Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
|
---|
2693 |
|
---|
2694 | @itemize @bullet
|
---|
2695 | @item
|
---|
2696 | a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
|
---|
2697 | @item
|
---|
2698 | an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
|
---|
2699 | @item
|
---|
2700 | data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
|
---|
2701 | @item
|
---|
2702 | a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
|
---|
2703 | @end itemize
|
---|
2704 |
|
---|
2705 | @node Output Section Name
|
---|
2706 | @subsection Output Section Name
|
---|
2707 | @cindex name, section
|
---|
2708 | @cindex section name
|
---|
2709 | The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
|
---|
2710 | meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
|
---|
2711 | support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
|
---|
2712 | must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
|
---|
2713 | example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
|
---|
2714 | output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
|
---|
2715 | names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
|
---|
2716 | quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
|
---|
2717 | characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
|
---|
2718 | commas must be quoted.
|
---|
2719 |
|
---|
2720 | The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
|
---|
2721 | Discarding}.
|
---|
2722 |
|
---|
2723 | @node Output Section Address
|
---|
2724 | @subsection Output Section Description
|
---|
2725 | @cindex address, section
|
---|
2726 | @cindex section address
|
---|
2727 | The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
|
---|
2728 | address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
|
---|
2729 | the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
|
---|
2730 | based on the current value of the location counter.
|
---|
2731 |
|
---|
2732 | If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
|
---|
2733 | set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
|
---|
2734 | @var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
|
---|
2735 | current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
|
---|
2736 | requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
|
---|
2737 | output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
|
---|
2738 | within the output section.
|
---|
2739 |
|
---|
2740 | For example,
|
---|
2741 | @smallexample
|
---|
2742 | .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
|
---|
2743 | @end smallexample
|
---|
2744 | @noindent
|
---|
2745 | and
|
---|
2746 | @smallexample
|
---|
2747 | .text : @{ *(.text) @}
|
---|
2748 | @end smallexample
|
---|
2749 | @noindent
|
---|
2750 | are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
|
---|
2751 | @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
|
---|
2752 | counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
|
---|
2753 | counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
|
---|
2754 | section.
|
---|
2755 |
|
---|
2756 | The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
|
---|
2757 | For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
|
---|
2758 | so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
|
---|
2759 | do something like this:
|
---|
2760 | @smallexample
|
---|
2761 | .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
|
---|
2762 | @end smallexample
|
---|
2763 | @noindent
|
---|
2764 | This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
|
---|
2765 | aligned upward to the specified value.
|
---|
2766 |
|
---|
2767 | Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
|
---|
2768 | location counter.
|
---|
2769 |
|
---|
2770 | @node Input Section
|
---|
2771 | @subsection Input Section Description
|
---|
2772 | @cindex input sections
|
---|
2773 | @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
|
---|
2774 | The most common output section command is an input section description.
|
---|
2775 |
|
---|
2776 | The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
|
---|
2777 | You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
|
---|
2778 | in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
|
---|
2779 | map the input files into your memory layout.
|
---|
2780 |
|
---|
2781 | @menu
|
---|
2782 | * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
|
---|
2783 | * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
|
---|
2784 | * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
|
---|
2785 | * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
|
---|
2786 | * Input Section Example:: Input section example
|
---|
2787 | @end menu
|
---|
2788 |
|
---|
2789 | @node Input Section Basics
|
---|
2790 | @subsubsection Input Section Basics
|
---|
2791 | @cindex input section basics
|
---|
2792 | An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
|
---|
2793 | by a list of section names in parentheses.
|
---|
2794 |
|
---|
2795 | The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
|
---|
2796 | describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
|
---|
2797 |
|
---|
2798 | The most common input section description is to include all input
|
---|
2799 | sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
|
---|
2800 | include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
|
---|
2801 | @smallexample
|
---|
2802 | *(.text)
|
---|
2803 | @end smallexample
|
---|
2804 | @noindent
|
---|
2805 | Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
|
---|
2806 | of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
|
---|
2807 | match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
|
---|
2808 | example:
|
---|
2809 | @smallexample
|
---|
2810 | (*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors))
|
---|
2811 | @end smallexample
|
---|
2812 | will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
|
---|
2813 | @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
|
---|
2814 |
|
---|
2815 | There are two ways to include more than one section:
|
---|
2816 | @smallexample
|
---|
2817 | *(.text .rdata)
|
---|
2818 | *(.text) *(.rdata)
|
---|
2819 | @end smallexample
|
---|
2820 | @noindent
|
---|
2821 | The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
|
---|
2822 | @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
|
---|
2823 | first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
|
---|
2824 | they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
|
---|
2825 | @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
|
---|
2826 | @samp{.rdata} input sections.
|
---|
2827 |
|
---|
2828 | You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
|
---|
2829 | You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
|
---|
2830 | needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
|
---|
2831 | @smallexample
|
---|
2832 | data.o(.data)
|
---|
2833 | @end smallexample
|
---|
2834 |
|
---|
2835 | If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
|
---|
2836 | the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
|
---|
2837 | commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
|
---|
2838 | @smallexample
|
---|
2839 | data.o
|
---|
2840 | @end smallexample
|
---|
2841 |
|
---|
2842 | When you use a file name which does not contain any wild card
|
---|
2843 | characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
|
---|
2844 | name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
|
---|
2845 | did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
|
---|
2846 | though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
|
---|
2847 | @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
|
---|
2848 | the archive search path.
|
---|
2849 |
|
---|
2850 | @node Input Section Wildcards
|
---|
2851 | @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
|
---|
2852 | @cindex input section wildcards
|
---|
2853 | @cindex wildcard file name patterns
|
---|
2854 | @cindex file name wildcard patterns
|
---|
2855 | @cindex section name wildcard patterns
|
---|
2856 | In an input section description, either the file name or the section
|
---|
2857 | name or both may be wildcard patterns.
|
---|
2858 |
|
---|
2859 | The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
|
---|
2860 | pattern for the file name.
|
---|
2861 |
|
---|
2862 | The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
|
---|
2863 |
|
---|
2864 | @table @samp
|
---|
2865 | @item *
|
---|
2866 | matches any number of characters
|
---|
2867 | @item ?
|
---|
2868 | matches any single character
|
---|
2869 | @item [@var{chars}]
|
---|
2870 | matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
|
---|
2871 | character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
|
---|
2872 | @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
|
---|
2873 | @item \
|
---|
2874 | quotes the following character
|
---|
2875 | @end table
|
---|
2876 |
|
---|
2877 | When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
|
---|
2878 | will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
|
---|
2879 | Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
|
---|
2880 | exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
|
---|
2881 | @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
|
---|
2882 | a @samp{/} character.
|
---|
2883 |
|
---|
2884 | File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
|
---|
2885 | specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
|
---|
2886 | does not search directories to expand wildcards.
|
---|
2887 |
|
---|
2888 | If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
|
---|
2889 | appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
|
---|
2890 | will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
|
---|
2891 | sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
|
---|
2892 | @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
|
---|
2893 | @smallexample
|
---|
2894 | .data : @{ *(.data) @}
|
---|
2895 | .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
|
---|
2896 | @end smallexample
|
---|
2897 |
|
---|
2898 | @cindex SORT
|
---|
2899 | Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
|
---|
2900 | in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
|
---|
2901 | this by using the @code{SORT} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
|
---|
2902 | pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT(.text*)}). When the
|
---|
2903 | @code{SORT} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
|
---|
2904 | into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
|
---|
2905 |
|
---|
2906 | If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
|
---|
2907 | @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
|
---|
2908 | precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
|
---|
2909 |
|
---|
2910 | This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
|
---|
2911 | files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
|
---|
2912 | sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
|
---|
2913 | The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
|
---|
2914 | with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
|
---|
2915 | linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
|
---|
2916 | @smallexample
|
---|
2917 | @group
|
---|
2918 | SECTIONS @{
|
---|
2919 | .text : @{ *(.text) @}
|
---|
2920 | .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
|
---|
2921 | .data : @{ *(.data) @}
|
---|
2922 | .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
|
---|
2923 | @}
|
---|
2924 | @end group
|
---|
2925 | @end smallexample
|
---|
2926 |
|
---|
2927 | @node Input Section Common
|
---|
2928 | @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
|
---|
2929 | @cindex common symbol placement
|
---|
2930 | @cindex uninitialized data placement
|
---|
2931 | A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
|
---|
2932 | file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
|
---|
2933 | linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
|
---|
2934 | named @samp{COMMON}.
|
---|
2935 |
|
---|
2936 | You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
|
---|
2937 | other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
|
---|
2938 | particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
|
---|
2939 | input files are placed in another section.
|
---|
2940 |
|
---|
2941 | In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
|
---|
2942 | @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
|
---|
2943 | @smallexample
|
---|
2944 | .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
|
---|
2945 | @end smallexample
|
---|
2946 |
|
---|
2947 | @cindex scommon section
|
---|
2948 | @cindex small common symbols
|
---|
2949 | Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
|
---|
2950 | example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
|
---|
2951 | symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
|
---|
2952 | different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
|
---|
2953 | the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
|
---|
2954 | symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
|
---|
2955 | to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
|
---|
2956 | locations.
|
---|
2957 |
|
---|
2958 | @cindex [COMMON]
|
---|
2959 | You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
|
---|
2960 | notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
|
---|
2961 | @samp{*(COMMON)}.
|
---|
2962 |
|
---|
2963 | @node Input Section Keep
|
---|
2964 | @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
|
---|
2965 | @cindex KEEP
|
---|
2966 | @cindex garbage collection
|
---|
2967 | When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
|
---|
2968 | it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
|
---|
2969 | This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
|
---|
2970 | with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
|
---|
2971 | @code{KEEP(SORT(*)(.ctors))}.
|
---|
2972 |
|
---|
2973 | @node Input Section Example
|
---|
2974 | @subsubsection Input Section Example
|
---|
2975 | The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
|
---|
2976 | to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
|
---|
2977 | start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
|
---|
2978 | @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
|
---|
2979 | follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
|
---|
2980 | @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
|
---|
2981 | @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
|
---|
2982 | All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
|
---|
2983 | files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
|
---|
2984 |
|
---|
2985 | @smallexample
|
---|
2986 | @group
|
---|
2987 | SECTIONS @{
|
---|
2988 | outputa 0x10000 :
|
---|
2989 | @{
|
---|
2990 | all.o
|
---|
2991 | foo.o (.input1)
|
---|
2992 | @}
|
---|
2993 | @end group
|
---|
2994 | @group
|
---|
2995 | outputb :
|
---|
2996 | @{
|
---|
2997 | foo.o (.input2)
|
---|
2998 | foo1.o (.input1)
|
---|
2999 | @}
|
---|
3000 | @end group
|
---|
3001 | @group
|
---|
3002 | outputc :
|
---|
3003 | @{
|
---|
3004 | *(.input1)
|
---|
3005 | *(.input2)
|
---|
3006 | @}
|
---|
3007 | @}
|
---|
3008 | @end group
|
---|
3009 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3010 |
|
---|
3011 | @node Output Section Data
|
---|
3012 | @subsection Output Section Data
|
---|
3013 | @cindex data
|
---|
3014 | @cindex section data
|
---|
3015 | @cindex output section data
|
---|
3016 | @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
|
---|
3017 | @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
|
---|
3018 | @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
|
---|
3019 | @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
|
---|
3020 | @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
|
---|
3021 | You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
|
---|
3022 | @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
|
---|
3023 | an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
|
---|
3024 | parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
|
---|
3025 | value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
|
---|
3026 | counter.
|
---|
3027 |
|
---|
3028 | The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
|
---|
3029 | store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
|
---|
3030 | bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
|
---|
3031 | stored.
|
---|
3032 |
|
---|
3033 | For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
|
---|
3034 | of the symbol @samp{addr}:
|
---|
3035 | @smallexample
|
---|
3036 | BYTE(1)
|
---|
3037 | LONG(addr)
|
---|
3038 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3039 |
|
---|
3040 | When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
|
---|
3041 | same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
|
---|
3042 | target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
|
---|
3043 | @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
|
---|
3044 | @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
|
---|
3045 |
|
---|
3046 | If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
|
---|
3047 | which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
|
---|
3048 | When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
|
---|
3049 | true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
|
---|
3050 | endianness of the first input object file.
|
---|
3051 |
|
---|
3052 | Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
|
---|
3053 | between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
|
---|
3054 | @smallexample
|
---|
3055 | SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
|
---|
3056 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3057 | whereas this will work:
|
---|
3058 | @smallexample
|
---|
3059 | SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
|
---|
3060 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3061 |
|
---|
3062 | @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
|
---|
3063 | @cindex holes, filling
|
---|
3064 | @cindex unspecified memory
|
---|
3065 | You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
|
---|
3066 | current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
|
---|
3067 | otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
|
---|
3068 | gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
|
---|
3069 | with the value of the expression, repeated as
|
---|
3070 | necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
|
---|
3071 | point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
|
---|
3072 | than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
|
---|
3073 | different parts of an output section.
|
---|
3074 |
|
---|
3075 | This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
|
---|
3076 | value @samp{0x90}:
|
---|
3077 | @smallexample
|
---|
3078 | FILL(0x90909090)
|
---|
3079 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3080 |
|
---|
3081 | The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
|
---|
3082 | section attribute, but it only affects the
|
---|
3083 | part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
|
---|
3084 | entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
|
---|
3085 | precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
|
---|
3086 | expression.
|
---|
3087 |
|
---|
3088 | @node Output Section Keywords
|
---|
3089 | @subsection Output Section Keywords
|
---|
3090 | There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
|
---|
3091 | commands.
|
---|
3092 |
|
---|
3093 | @table @code
|
---|
3094 | @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
|
---|
3095 | @cindex input filename symbols
|
---|
3096 | @cindex filename symbols
|
---|
3097 | @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
|
---|
3098 | The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
|
---|
3099 | The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
|
---|
3100 | file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
|
---|
3101 | the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
|
---|
3102 |
|
---|
3103 | This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
|
---|
3104 | normally used for any other object file format.
|
---|
3105 |
|
---|
3106 | @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
|
---|
3107 | @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
|
---|
3108 | @cindex constructors, arranging in link
|
---|
3109 | @item CONSTRUCTORS
|
---|
3110 | When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
|
---|
3111 | unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
|
---|
3112 | destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
|
---|
3113 | arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
|
---|
3114 | automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
|
---|
3115 | For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
|
---|
3116 | linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
|
---|
3117 | @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
|
---|
3118 | ignored for other object file formats.
|
---|
3119 |
|
---|
3120 | The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
|
---|
3121 | constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST}} marks the end. The
|
---|
3122 | first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
|
---|
3123 | of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
|
---|
3124 | compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
|
---|
3125 | formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
|
---|
3126 | @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
|
---|
3127 | the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
|
---|
3128 | destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
|
---|
3129 | @code{exit}.
|
---|
3130 |
|
---|
3131 | For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
|
---|
3132 | arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
|
---|
3133 | addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
|
---|
3134 | and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
|
---|
3135 | linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
|
---|
3136 | runtime code expects to see.
|
---|
3137 |
|
---|
3138 | @smallexample
|
---|
3139 | __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
|
---|
3140 | LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
|
---|
3141 | *(.ctors)
|
---|
3142 | LONG(0)
|
---|
3143 | __CTOR_END__ = .;
|
---|
3144 | __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
|
---|
3145 | LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
|
---|
3146 | *(.dtors)
|
---|
3147 | LONG(0)
|
---|
3148 | __DTOR_END__ = .;
|
---|
3149 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3150 |
|
---|
3151 | If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
|
---|
3152 | which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
|
---|
3153 | are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
|
---|
3154 | are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
|
---|
3155 | command, use @samp{SORT(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
|
---|
3156 | @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT(.ctors))} and
|
---|
3157 | @samp{*(SORT(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
|
---|
3158 | @samp{*(.dtors)}.
|
---|
3159 |
|
---|
3160 | Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
|
---|
3161 | and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
|
---|
3162 | need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
|
---|
3163 | scripts.
|
---|
3164 |
|
---|
3165 | @end table
|
---|
3166 |
|
---|
3167 | @node Output Section Discarding
|
---|
3168 | @subsection Output Section Discarding
|
---|
3169 | @cindex discarding sections
|
---|
3170 | @cindex sections, discarding
|
---|
3171 | @cindex removing sections
|
---|
3172 | The linker will not create output section which do not have any
|
---|
3173 | contents. This is for convenience when referring to input sections that
|
---|
3174 | may or may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
|
---|
3175 | @smallexample
|
---|
3176 | .foo @{ *(.foo) @}
|
---|
3177 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3178 | @noindent
|
---|
3179 | will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
|
---|
3180 | @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file.
|
---|
3181 |
|
---|
3182 | If you use anything other than an input section description as an output
|
---|
3183 | section command, such as a symbol assignment, then the output section
|
---|
3184 | will always be created, even if there are no matching input sections.
|
---|
3185 |
|
---|
3186 | @cindex /DISCARD/
|
---|
3187 | The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
|
---|
3188 | input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
|
---|
3189 | section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
|
---|
3190 |
|
---|
3191 | @node Output Section Attributes
|
---|
3192 | @subsection Output Section Attributes
|
---|
3193 | @cindex output section attributes
|
---|
3194 | We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
|
---|
3195 | like this:
|
---|
3196 | @smallexample
|
---|
3197 | @group
|
---|
3198 | @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] : [AT(@var{lma})]
|
---|
3199 | @{
|
---|
3200 | @var{output-section-command}
|
---|
3201 | @var{output-section-command}
|
---|
3202 | @dots{}
|
---|
3203 | @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
|
---|
3204 | @end group
|
---|
3205 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3206 | We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
|
---|
3207 | @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
|
---|
3208 | remaining section attributes.
|
---|
3209 |
|
---|
3210 | @menu
|
---|
3211 | * Output Section Type:: Output section type
|
---|
3212 | * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
|
---|
3213 | * Output Section Region:: Output section region
|
---|
3214 | * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
|
---|
3215 | * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
|
---|
3216 | @end menu
|
---|
3217 |
|
---|
3218 | @node Output Section Type
|
---|
3219 | @subsubsection Output Section Type
|
---|
3220 | Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
|
---|
3221 | parentheses. The following types are defined:
|
---|
3222 |
|
---|
3223 | @table @code
|
---|
3224 | @item NOLOAD
|
---|
3225 | The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
|
---|
3226 | loaded into memory when the program is run.
|
---|
3227 | @item DSECT
|
---|
3228 | @itemx COPY
|
---|
3229 | @itemx INFO
|
---|
3230 | @itemx OVERLAY
|
---|
3231 | These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
|
---|
3232 | rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
|
---|
3233 | marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
|
---|
3234 | section when the program is run.
|
---|
3235 | @end table
|
---|
3236 |
|
---|
3237 | @kindex NOLOAD
|
---|
3238 | @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
|
---|
3239 | @cindex loading, preventing
|
---|
3240 | The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
|
---|
3241 | the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
|
---|
3242 | the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
|
---|
3243 | @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
|
---|
3244 | need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
|
---|
3245 | @samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
|
---|
3246 | @smallexample
|
---|
3247 | @group
|
---|
3248 | SECTIONS @{
|
---|
3249 | ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
|
---|
3250 | @dots{}
|
---|
3251 | @}
|
---|
3252 | @end group
|
---|
3253 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3254 |
|
---|
3255 | @node Output Section LMA
|
---|
3256 | @subsubsection Output Section LMA
|
---|
3257 | @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
|
---|
3258 | @kindex AT(@var{lma})
|
---|
3259 | @cindex load address
|
---|
3260 | @cindex section load address
|
---|
3261 | Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
|
---|
3262 | @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
|
---|
3263 | an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
|
---|
3264 | Address}).
|
---|
3265 |
|
---|
3266 | The linker will normally set the LMA equal to the VMA. You can change
|
---|
3267 | that by using the @code{AT} keyword. The expression @var{lma} that
|
---|
3268 | follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies the load address of the
|
---|
3269 | section. Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression,
|
---|
3270 | you may specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
|
---|
3271 |
|
---|
3272 | @cindex ROM initialized data
|
---|
3273 | @cindex initialized data in ROM
|
---|
3274 | This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
|
---|
3275 | example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
|
---|
3276 | called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
|
---|
3277 | @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
|
---|
3278 | even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
|
---|
3279 | uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
|
---|
3280 | defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
|
---|
3281 | counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
|
---|
3282 |
|
---|
3283 | @smallexample
|
---|
3284 | @group
|
---|
3285 | SECTIONS
|
---|
3286 | @{
|
---|
3287 | .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
|
---|
3288 | .mdata 0x2000 :
|
---|
3289 | AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
|
---|
3290 | @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
|
---|
3291 | .bss 0x3000 :
|
---|
3292 | @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
|
---|
3293 | @}
|
---|
3294 | @end group
|
---|
3295 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3296 |
|
---|
3297 | The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
|
---|
3298 | this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
|
---|
3299 | the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
|
---|
3300 | how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
|
---|
3301 | script.
|
---|
3302 |
|
---|
3303 | @smallexample
|
---|
3304 | @group
|
---|
3305 | extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
|
---|
3306 | char *src = &_etext;
|
---|
3307 | char *dst = &_data;
|
---|
3308 |
|
---|
3309 | /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
|
---|
3310 | while (dst < &_edata) @{
|
---|
3311 | *dst++ = *src++;
|
---|
3312 | @}
|
---|
3313 |
|
---|
3314 | /* Zero bss */
|
---|
3315 | for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
|
---|
3316 | *dst = 0;
|
---|
3317 | @end group
|
---|
3318 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3319 |
|
---|
3320 | @node Output Section Region
|
---|
3321 | @subsubsection Output Section Region
|
---|
3322 | @kindex >@var{region}
|
---|
3323 | @cindex section, assigning to memory region
|
---|
3324 | @cindex memory regions and sections
|
---|
3325 | You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
|
---|
3326 | using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
|
---|
3327 |
|
---|
3328 | Here is a simple example:
|
---|
3329 | @smallexample
|
---|
3330 | @group
|
---|
3331 | MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
|
---|
3332 | SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
|
---|
3333 | @end group
|
---|
3334 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3335 |
|
---|
3336 | @node Output Section Phdr
|
---|
3337 | @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
|
---|
3338 | @kindex :@var{phdr}
|
---|
3339 | @cindex section, assigning to program header
|
---|
3340 | @cindex program headers and sections
|
---|
3341 | You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
|
---|
3342 | using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
|
---|
3343 | one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
|
---|
3344 | assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
|
---|
3345 | @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
|
---|
3346 | linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
|
---|
3347 |
|
---|
3348 | Here is a simple example:
|
---|
3349 | @smallexample
|
---|
3350 | @group
|
---|
3351 | PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
|
---|
3352 | SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
|
---|
3353 | @end group
|
---|
3354 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3355 |
|
---|
3356 | @node Output Section Fill
|
---|
3357 | @subsubsection Output Section Fill
|
---|
3358 | @kindex =@var{fillexp}
|
---|
3359 | @cindex section fill pattern
|
---|
3360 | @cindex fill pattern, entire section
|
---|
3361 | You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
|
---|
3362 | @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
|
---|
3363 | (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
|
---|
3364 | within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
|
---|
3365 | alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
|
---|
3366 | necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
|
---|
3367 | of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
|
---|
3368 | an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
|
---|
3369 | fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
|
---|
3370 | other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
|
---|
3371 | pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
|
---|
3372 | expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
|
---|
3373 |
|
---|
3374 | You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
|
---|
3375 | output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
|
---|
3376 |
|
---|
3377 | Here is a simple example:
|
---|
3378 | @smallexample
|
---|
3379 | @group
|
---|
3380 | SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
|
---|
3381 | @end group
|
---|
3382 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3383 |
|
---|
3384 | @node Overlay Description
|
---|
3385 | @subsection Overlay Description
|
---|
3386 | @kindex OVERLAY
|
---|
3387 | @cindex overlays
|
---|
3388 | An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
|
---|
3389 | are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
|
---|
3390 | the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
|
---|
3391 | copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
|
---|
3392 | required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
|
---|
3393 | can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
|
---|
3394 | than another.
|
---|
3395 |
|
---|
3396 | Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
|
---|
3397 | @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
|
---|
3398 | output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
|
---|
3399 | command is as follows:
|
---|
3400 | @smallexample
|
---|
3401 | @group
|
---|
3402 | OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
|
---|
3403 | @{
|
---|
3404 | @var{secname1}
|
---|
3405 | @{
|
---|
3406 | @var{output-section-command}
|
---|
3407 | @var{output-section-command}
|
---|
3408 | @dots{}
|
---|
3409 | @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
|
---|
3410 | @var{secname2}
|
---|
3411 | @{
|
---|
3412 | @var{output-section-command}
|
---|
3413 | @var{output-section-command}
|
---|
3414 | @dots{}
|
---|
3415 | @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
|
---|
3416 | @dots{}
|
---|
3417 | @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
|
---|
3418 | @end group
|
---|
3419 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3420 |
|
---|
3421 | Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
|
---|
3422 | section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
|
---|
3423 | section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
|
---|
3424 | those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
|
---|
3425 | except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
|
---|
3426 | sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
|
---|
3427 |
|
---|
3428 | The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
|
---|
3429 | addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
|
---|
3430 | memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
|
---|
3431 | whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
|
---|
3432 | and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
|
---|
3433 | and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
|
---|
3434 |
|
---|
3435 | If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
|
---|
3436 | among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
|
---|
3437 | all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
|
---|
3438 | section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
|
---|
3439 | NOCROSSREFS}.
|
---|
3440 |
|
---|
3441 | For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
|
---|
3442 | defines two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
|
---|
3443 | defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
|
---|
3444 | @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
|
---|
3445 | the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
|
---|
3446 | within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
|
---|
3447 | symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
|
---|
3448 |
|
---|
3449 | At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
|
---|
3450 | the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
|
---|
3451 |
|
---|
3452 | Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
|
---|
3453 | @code{SECTIONS} construct.
|
---|
3454 | @smallexample
|
---|
3455 | @group
|
---|
3456 | OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
|
---|
3457 | @{
|
---|
3458 | .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
|
---|
3459 | .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
|
---|
3460 | @}
|
---|
3461 | @end group
|
---|
3462 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3463 | @noindent
|
---|
3464 | This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
|
---|
3465 | address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
|
---|
3466 | @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
|
---|
3467 | following symbols will be defined: @code{__load_start_text0},
|
---|
3468 | @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
|
---|
3469 | @code{__load_stop_text1}.
|
---|
3470 |
|
---|
3471 | C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
|
---|
3472 | like the following.
|
---|
3473 |
|
---|
3474 | @smallexample
|
---|
3475 | @group
|
---|
3476 | extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
|
---|
3477 | memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
|
---|
3478 | &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
|
---|
3479 | @end group
|
---|
3480 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3481 |
|
---|
3482 | Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
|
---|
3483 | everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
|
---|
3484 | example could have been written identically as follows.
|
---|
3485 |
|
---|
3486 | @smallexample
|
---|
3487 | @group
|
---|
3488 | .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
|
---|
3489 | __load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0);
|
---|
3490 | __load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0);
|
---|
3491 | .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
|
---|
3492 | __load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1);
|
---|
3493 | __load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1);
|
---|
3494 | . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
|
---|
3495 | @end group
|
---|
3496 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3497 |
|
---|
3498 | @node MEMORY
|
---|
3499 | @section MEMORY Command
|
---|
3500 | @kindex MEMORY
|
---|
3501 | @cindex memory regions
|
---|
3502 | @cindex regions of memory
|
---|
3503 | @cindex allocating memory
|
---|
3504 | @cindex discontinuous memory
|
---|
3505 | The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
|
---|
3506 | memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
|
---|
3507 |
|
---|
3508 | The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
|
---|
3509 | memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
|
---|
3510 | may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
|
---|
3511 | can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
|
---|
3512 | set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
|
---|
3513 | regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
|
---|
3514 | around to fit into the available regions.
|
---|
3515 |
|
---|
3516 | A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
|
---|
3517 | command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
|
---|
3518 | you wish. The syntax is:
|
---|
3519 | @smallexample
|
---|
3520 | @group
|
---|
3521 | MEMORY
|
---|
3522 | @{
|
---|
3523 | @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
|
---|
3524 | @dots{}
|
---|
3525 | @}
|
---|
3526 | @end group
|
---|
3527 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3528 |
|
---|
3529 | The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
|
---|
3530 | region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
|
---|
3531 | Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
|
---|
3532 | with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
|
---|
3533 | must have a distinct name.
|
---|
3534 |
|
---|
3535 | @cindex memory region attributes
|
---|
3536 | The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
|
---|
3537 | whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
|
---|
3538 | not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
|
---|
3539 | @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
|
---|
3540 | section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
|
---|
3541 | the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
|
---|
3542 | them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
|
---|
3543 |
|
---|
3544 | The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
|
---|
3545 | @table @samp
|
---|
3546 | @item R
|
---|
3547 | Read-only section
|
---|
3548 | @item W
|
---|
3549 | Read/write section
|
---|
3550 | @item X
|
---|
3551 | Executable section
|
---|
3552 | @item A
|
---|
3553 | Allocatable section
|
---|
3554 | @item I
|
---|
3555 | Initialized section
|
---|
3556 | @item L
|
---|
3557 | Same as @samp{I}
|
---|
3558 | @item !
|
---|
3559 | Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
|
---|
3560 | @end table
|
---|
3561 |
|
---|
3562 | If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
|
---|
3563 | @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
|
---|
3564 | attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
|
---|
3565 | in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
|
---|
3566 | attributes.
|
---|
3567 |
|
---|
3568 | @kindex ORIGIN =
|
---|
3569 | @kindex o =
|
---|
3570 | @kindex org =
|
---|
3571 | The @var{origin} is an expression for the start address of the memory
|
---|
3572 | region. The expression must evaluate to a constant before memory
|
---|
3573 | allocation is performed, which means that you may not use any section
|
---|
3574 | relative symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be abbreviated to
|
---|
3575 | @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example, @code{ORG}).
|
---|
3576 |
|
---|
3577 | @kindex LENGTH =
|
---|
3578 | @kindex len =
|
---|
3579 | @kindex l =
|
---|
3580 | The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
|
---|
3581 | region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
|
---|
3582 | evaluate to a constant before memory allocation is performed. The
|
---|
3583 | keyword @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
|
---|
3584 |
|
---|
3585 | In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
|
---|
3586 | available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
|
---|
3587 | and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
|
---|
3588 | linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
|
---|
3589 | is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
|
---|
3590 | or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
|
---|
3591 | explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
|
---|
3592 | region.
|
---|
3593 |
|
---|
3594 | @smallexample
|
---|
3595 | @group
|
---|
3596 | MEMORY
|
---|
3597 | @{
|
---|
3598 | rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
|
---|
3599 | ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
|
---|
3600 | @}
|
---|
3601 | @end group
|
---|
3602 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3603 |
|
---|
3604 | Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
|
---|
3605 | specific output sections into that memory region by using the
|
---|
3606 | @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
|
---|
3607 | a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
|
---|
3608 | output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
|
---|
3609 | was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
|
---|
3610 | the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
|
---|
3611 | output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
|
---|
3612 | region, the linker will issue an error message.
|
---|
3613 |
|
---|
3614 | @node PHDRS
|
---|
3615 | @section PHDRS Command
|
---|
3616 | @kindex PHDRS
|
---|
3617 | @cindex program headers
|
---|
3618 | @cindex ELF program headers
|
---|
3619 | @cindex program segments
|
---|
3620 | @cindex segments, ELF
|
---|
3621 | The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
|
---|
3622 | @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
|
---|
3623 | loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
|
---|
3624 | program with the @samp{-p} option.
|
---|
3625 |
|
---|
3626 | When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
|
---|
3627 | reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
|
---|
3628 | program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
|
---|
3629 | This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
|
---|
3630 | interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
|
---|
3631 |
|
---|
3632 | The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
|
---|
3633 | in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
|
---|
3634 | precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
|
---|
3635 | the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
|
---|
3636 | not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
|
---|
3637 |
|
---|
3638 | The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
|
---|
3639 | generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
|
---|
3640 | ignore @code{PHDRS}.
|
---|
3641 |
|
---|
3642 | This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
|
---|
3643 | @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
|
---|
3644 |
|
---|
3645 | @smallexample
|
---|
3646 | @group
|
---|
3647 | PHDRS
|
---|
3648 | @{
|
---|
3649 | @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
|
---|
3650 | [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
|
---|
3651 | @}
|
---|
3652 | @end group
|
---|
3653 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3654 |
|
---|
3655 | The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
|
---|
3656 | of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
|
---|
3657 | header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
|
---|
3658 | with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
|
---|
3659 | must have a distinct name.
|
---|
3660 |
|
---|
3661 | Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
|
---|
3662 | system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
|
---|
3663 | specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
|
---|
3664 | sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
|
---|
3665 | attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
|
---|
3666 | Section Phdr}.
|
---|
3667 |
|
---|
3668 | It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
|
---|
3669 | merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
|
---|
3670 | repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
|
---|
3671 | contain the section.
|
---|
3672 |
|
---|
3673 | If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
|
---|
3674 | then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
|
---|
3675 | not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
|
---|
3676 | convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
|
---|
3677 | placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
|
---|
3678 | default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
|
---|
3679 | segment at all.
|
---|
3680 |
|
---|
3681 | @kindex FILEHDR
|
---|
3682 | @kindex PHDRS
|
---|
3683 | You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords appear after
|
---|
3684 | the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
|
---|
3685 | The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
|
---|
3686 | file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
|
---|
3687 | include the ELF program headers themselves.
|
---|
3688 |
|
---|
3689 | The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
|
---|
3690 | value of the keyword.
|
---|
3691 |
|
---|
3692 | @table @asis
|
---|
3693 | @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
|
---|
3694 | Indicates an unused program header.
|
---|
3695 |
|
---|
3696 | @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
|
---|
3697 | Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
|
---|
3698 | the file.
|
---|
3699 |
|
---|
3700 | @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
|
---|
3701 | Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
|
---|
3702 |
|
---|
3703 | @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
|
---|
3704 | Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
|
---|
3705 | found.
|
---|
3706 |
|
---|
3707 | @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
|
---|
3708 | Indicates a segment holding note information.
|
---|
3709 |
|
---|
3710 | @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
|
---|
3711 | A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
|
---|
3712 | ABI.
|
---|
3713 |
|
---|
3714 | @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
|
---|
3715 | Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
|
---|
3716 |
|
---|
3717 | @item @var{expression}
|
---|
3718 | An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
|
---|
3719 | be used for types not defined above.
|
---|
3720 | @end table
|
---|
3721 |
|
---|
3722 | You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
|
---|
3723 | in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
|
---|
3724 | @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
|
---|
3725 | Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
|
---|
3726 | output section attribute.
|
---|
3727 |
|
---|
3728 | The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
|
---|
3729 | which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
|
---|
3730 | explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
|
---|
3731 | an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
|
---|
3732 | header.
|
---|
3733 |
|
---|
3734 | Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
|
---|
3735 | headers used on a native ELF system.
|
---|
3736 |
|
---|
3737 | @example
|
---|
3738 | @group
|
---|
3739 | PHDRS
|
---|
3740 | @{
|
---|
3741 | headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
|
---|
3742 | interp PT_INTERP ;
|
---|
3743 | text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
|
---|
3744 | data PT_LOAD ;
|
---|
3745 | dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
|
---|
3746 | @}
|
---|
3747 |
|
---|
3748 | SECTIONS
|
---|
3749 | @{
|
---|
3750 | . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
|
---|
3751 | .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
|
---|
3752 | .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
|
---|
3753 | .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
|
---|
3754 | @dots{}
|
---|
3755 | . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
|
---|
3756 | .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
|
---|
3757 | .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
|
---|
3758 | @dots{}
|
---|
3759 | @}
|
---|
3760 | @end group
|
---|
3761 | @end example
|
---|
3762 |
|
---|
3763 | @node VERSION
|
---|
3764 | @section VERSION Command
|
---|
3765 | @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
|
---|
3766 | @cindex symbol versions
|
---|
3767 | @cindex version script
|
---|
3768 | @cindex versions of symbols
|
---|
3769 | The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
|
---|
3770 | only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
|
---|
3771 | symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
|
---|
3772 | a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
|
---|
3773 | shared library.
|
---|
3774 |
|
---|
3775 | You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
|
---|
3776 | you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
|
---|
3777 | also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
|
---|
3778 |
|
---|
3779 | The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
|
---|
3780 | @smallexample
|
---|
3781 | VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
|
---|
3782 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3783 |
|
---|
3784 | The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
|
---|
3785 | Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
|
---|
3786 | version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
|
---|
3787 | version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
|
---|
3788 | version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
|
---|
3789 | scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
|
---|
3790 | library.
|
---|
3791 |
|
---|
3792 | The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
|
---|
3793 | examples.
|
---|
3794 |
|
---|
3795 | @smallexample
|
---|
3796 | VERS_1.1 @{
|
---|
3797 | global:
|
---|
3798 | foo1;
|
---|
3799 | local:
|
---|
3800 | old*;
|
---|
3801 | original*;
|
---|
3802 | new*;
|
---|
3803 | @};
|
---|
3804 |
|
---|
3805 | VERS_1.2 @{
|
---|
3806 | foo2;
|
---|
3807 | @} VERS_1.1;
|
---|
3808 |
|
---|
3809 | VERS_2.0 @{
|
---|
3810 | bar1; bar2;
|
---|
3811 | @} VERS_1.2;
|
---|
3812 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3813 |
|
---|
3814 | This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
|
---|
3815 | version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
|
---|
3816 | The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
|
---|
3817 | a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
|
---|
3818 | of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
|
---|
3819 | symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
|
---|
3820 | is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
|
---|
3821 | in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
|
---|
3822 |
|
---|
3823 | Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
|
---|
3824 | depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
|
---|
3825 | to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
|
---|
3826 |
|
---|
3827 | Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
|
---|
3828 | depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
|
---|
3829 | and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
|
---|
3830 |
|
---|
3831 | When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
|
---|
3832 | specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
|
---|
3833 | unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
|
---|
3834 | unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
|
---|
3835 | somewhere in the version script.
|
---|
3836 |
|
---|
3837 | The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
|
---|
3838 | they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
|
---|
3839 | could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
|
---|
3840 | However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
|
---|
3841 |
|
---|
3842 | Node name can be omited, provided it is the only version node
|
---|
3843 | in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
|
---|
3844 | symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
|
---|
3845 | won't.
|
---|
3846 |
|
---|
3847 | @smallexample
|
---|
3848 | @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
|
---|
3849 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3850 |
|
---|
3851 | When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
|
---|
3852 | symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
|
---|
3853 | requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
|
---|
3854 | shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
|
---|
3855 | loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
|
---|
3856 | linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
|
---|
3857 | application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
|
---|
3858 | way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
|
---|
3859 | all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
|
---|
3860 | search for each symbol reference.
|
---|
3861 |
|
---|
3862 | The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
|
---|
3863 | doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
|
---|
3864 | that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
|
---|
3865 | functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
|
---|
3866 | the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
|
---|
3867 | required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
|
---|
3868 | that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
|
---|
3869 | versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
|
---|
3870 | the libraries being used with the application are too old.
|
---|
3871 |
|
---|
3872 | There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
|
---|
3873 | first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
|
---|
3874 | source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
|
---|
3875 | script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
|
---|
3876 | maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
|
---|
3877 | @smallexample
|
---|
3878 | __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
|
---|
3879 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3880 | @noindent
|
---|
3881 | in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
|
---|
3882 | be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
|
---|
3883 | The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
|
---|
3884 | @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
|
---|
3885 | takes precedence over a version script.
|
---|
3886 |
|
---|
3887 | The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
|
---|
3888 | function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
|
---|
3889 | an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
|
---|
3890 | version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
|
---|
3891 | linked against the old interface to continue to function.
|
---|
3892 |
|
---|
3893 | To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
|
---|
3894 | source file. Here is an example:
|
---|
3895 |
|
---|
3896 | @smallexample
|
---|
3897 | __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
|
---|
3898 | __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
|
---|
3899 | __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
|
---|
3900 | __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
|
---|
3901 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3902 |
|
---|
3903 | In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
|
---|
3904 | unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
|
---|
3905 | example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
|
---|
3906 | @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
|
---|
3907 |
|
---|
3908 | When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
|
---|
3909 | some way to specify a default version to which external references to
|
---|
3910 | this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
|
---|
3911 | @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
|
---|
3912 | declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
|
---|
3913 | you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
|
---|
3914 |
|
---|
3915 | If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
|
---|
3916 | within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
|
---|
3917 | (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
|
---|
3918 | specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
|
---|
3919 |
|
---|
3920 | You can also specify the language in the version script:
|
---|
3921 |
|
---|
3922 | @smallexample
|
---|
3923 | VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
|
---|
3924 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3925 |
|
---|
3926 | The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
|
---|
3927 | The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
|
---|
3928 | demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
|
---|
3929 | patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
|
---|
3930 |
|
---|
3931 | @node Expressions
|
---|
3932 | @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
|
---|
3933 | @cindex expressions
|
---|
3934 | @cindex arithmetic
|
---|
3935 | The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
|
---|
3936 | that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
|
---|
3937 | expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
|
---|
3938 | host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
|
---|
3939 |
|
---|
3940 | You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
|
---|
3941 |
|
---|
3942 | The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
|
---|
3943 | expressions.
|
---|
3944 |
|
---|
3945 | @menu
|
---|
3946 | * Constants:: Constants
|
---|
3947 | * Symbols:: Symbol Names
|
---|
3948 | * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
|
---|
3949 | * Operators:: Operators
|
---|
3950 | * Evaluation:: Evaluation
|
---|
3951 | * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
|
---|
3952 | * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
|
---|
3953 | @end menu
|
---|
3954 |
|
---|
3955 | @node Constants
|
---|
3956 | @subsection Constants
|
---|
3957 | @cindex integer notation
|
---|
3958 | @cindex constants in linker scripts
|
---|
3959 | All constants are integers.
|
---|
3960 |
|
---|
3961 | As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
|
---|
3962 | octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
|
---|
3963 | hexadecimal. The linker considers other integers to be decimal.
|
---|
3964 |
|
---|
3965 | @cindex scaled integers
|
---|
3966 | @cindex K and M integer suffixes
|
---|
3967 | @cindex M and K integer suffixes
|
---|
3968 | @cindex suffixes for integers
|
---|
3969 | @cindex integer suffixes
|
---|
3970 | In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
|
---|
3971 | constant by
|
---|
3972 | @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
|
---|
3973 | @ifnottex
|
---|
3974 | @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
|
---|
3975 | @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
|
---|
3976 | @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
|
---|
3977 | @end ifnottex
|
---|
3978 | @tex
|
---|
3979 | ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
|
---|
3980 | @end tex
|
---|
3981 | @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
|
---|
3982 | respectively. For example, the following all refer to the same quantity:
|
---|
3983 | @smallexample
|
---|
3984 | _fourk_1 = 4K;
|
---|
3985 | _fourk_2 = 4096;
|
---|
3986 | _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
|
---|
3987 | @end smallexample
|
---|
3988 |
|
---|
3989 | @node Symbols
|
---|
3990 | @subsection Symbol Names
|
---|
3991 | @cindex symbol names
|
---|
3992 | @cindex names
|
---|
3993 | @cindex quoted symbol names
|
---|
3994 | @kindex "
|
---|
3995 | Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
|
---|
3996 | and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
|
---|
3997 | Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
|
---|
3998 | specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
|
---|
3999 | keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
|
---|
4000 | @smallexample
|
---|
4001 | "SECTION" = 9;
|
---|
4002 | "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
|
---|
4003 | @end smallexample
|
---|
4004 |
|
---|
4005 | Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
|
---|
4006 | to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
|
---|
4007 | whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
|
---|
4008 |
|
---|
4009 | @node Location Counter
|
---|
4010 | @subsection The Location Counter
|
---|
4011 | @kindex .
|
---|
4012 | @cindex dot
|
---|
4013 | @cindex location counter
|
---|
4014 | @cindex current output location
|
---|
4015 | The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
|
---|
4016 | current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
|
---|
4017 | location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
|
---|
4018 | within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
|
---|
4019 | anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
|
---|
4020 |
|
---|
4021 | @cindex holes
|
---|
4022 | Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
|
---|
4023 | moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
|
---|
4024 | location counter may never be moved backwards.
|
---|
4025 |
|
---|
4026 | @smallexample
|
---|
4027 | SECTIONS
|
---|
4028 | @{
|
---|
4029 | output :
|
---|
4030 | @{
|
---|
4031 | file1(.text)
|
---|
4032 | . = . + 1000;
|
---|
4033 | file2(.text)
|
---|
4034 | . += 1000;
|
---|
4035 | file3(.text)
|
---|
4036 | @} = 0x12345678;
|
---|
4037 | @}
|
---|
4038 | @end smallexample
|
---|
4039 | @noindent
|
---|
4040 | In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
|
---|
4041 | located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
|
---|
4042 | followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
|
---|
4043 | @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
|
---|
4044 | @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
|
---|
4045 | specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
|
---|
4046 |
|
---|
4047 | @cindex dot inside sections
|
---|
4048 | Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
|
---|
4049 | current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
|
---|
4050 | statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
|
---|
4051 | absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
|
---|
4052 | however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
|
---|
4053 | not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
|
---|
4054 |
|
---|
4055 | @smallexample
|
---|
4056 | SECTIONS
|
---|
4057 | @{
|
---|
4058 | . = 0x100
|
---|
4059 | .text: @{
|
---|
4060 | *(.text)
|
---|
4061 | . = 0x200
|
---|
4062 | @}
|
---|
4063 | . = 0x500
|
---|
4064 | .data: @{
|
---|
4065 | *(.data)
|
---|
4066 | . += 0x600
|
---|
4067 | @}
|
---|
4068 | @}
|
---|
4069 | @end smallexample
|
---|
4070 |
|
---|
4071 | The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
|
---|
4072 | and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
|
---|
4073 | the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
|
---|
4074 | much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
|
---|
4075 | move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
|
---|
4076 | and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
|
---|
4077 | the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
|
---|
4078 | the @samp{.data} output section itself.
|
---|
4079 |
|
---|
4080 | @need 2000
|
---|
4081 | @node Operators
|
---|
4082 | @subsection Operators
|
---|
4083 | @cindex operators for arithmetic
|
---|
4084 | @cindex arithmetic operators
|
---|
4085 | @cindex precedence in expressions
|
---|
4086 | The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
|
---|
4087 | the standard bindings and precedence levels:
|
---|
4088 | @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
|
---|
4089 | @ifnottex
|
---|
4090 | @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
|
---|
4091 | @smallexample
|
---|
4092 | precedence associativity Operators Notes
|
---|
4093 | (highest)
|
---|
4094 | 1 left ! - ~ (1)
|
---|
4095 | 2 left * / %
|
---|
4096 | 3 left + -
|
---|
4097 | 4 left >> <<
|
---|
4098 | 5 left == != > < <= >=
|
---|
4099 | 6 left &
|
---|
4100 | 7 left |
|
---|
4101 | 8 left &&
|
---|
4102 | 9 left ||
|
---|
4103 | 10 right ? :
|
---|
4104 | 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
|
---|
4105 | (lowest)
|
---|
4106 | @end smallexample
|
---|
4107 | Notes:
|
---|
4108 | (1) Prefix operators
|
---|
4109 | (2) @xref{Assignments}.
|
---|
4110 | @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
|
---|
4111 | @end ifnottex
|
---|
4112 | @tex
|
---|
4113 | \vskip \baselineskip
|
---|
4114 | %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
|
---|
4115 | \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
|
---|
4116 | \hrule
|
---|
4117 | \halign
|
---|
4118 | {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
|
---|
4119 | height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
|
---|
4120 | &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
|
---|
4121 | height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
|
---|
4122 | \noalign{\hrule}
|
---|
4123 | height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
|
---|
4124 | &highest&&&&&\cr
|
---|
4125 | % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
|
---|
4126 | &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
|
---|
4127 | &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
|
---|
4128 | &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
|
---|
4129 | &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
|
---|
4130 | &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
|
---|
4131 | &6&&left&&\&&\cr
|
---|
4132 | &7&&left&&|&\cr
|
---|
4133 | &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
|
---|
4134 | &9&&left&&||&\cr
|
---|
4135 | &10&&right&&? :&\cr
|
---|
4136 | &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
|
---|
4137 | &lowest&&&&&\cr
|
---|
4138 | height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
|
---|
4139 | \hrule}
|
---|
4140 | @end tex
|
---|
4141 | @iftex
|
---|
4142 | {
|
---|
4143 | @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
|
---|
4144 | @dag@quad Prefix operators.
|
---|
4145 | @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
|
---|
4146 | }
|
---|
4147 | @end iftex
|
---|
4148 | @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
|
---|
4149 |
|
---|
4150 | @node Evaluation
|
---|
4151 | @subsection Evaluation
|
---|
4152 | @cindex lazy evaluation
|
---|
4153 | @cindex expression evaluation order
|
---|
4154 | The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
|
---|
4155 | an expression when absolutely necessary.
|
---|
4156 |
|
---|
4157 | The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
|
---|
4158 | address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
|
---|
4159 | regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
|
---|
4160 | as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
|
---|
4161 |
|
---|
4162 | However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
|
---|
4163 | until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
|
---|
4164 | other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
|
---|
4165 | for use in the symbol assignment expression.
|
---|
4166 |
|
---|
4167 | The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
|
---|
4168 | assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
|
---|
4169 | allocation.
|
---|
4170 |
|
---|
4171 | Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
|
---|
4172 | @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
|
---|
4173 |
|
---|
4174 | If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
|
---|
4175 | available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
|
---|
4176 | following
|
---|
4177 | @smallexample
|
---|
4178 | @group
|
---|
4179 | SECTIONS
|
---|
4180 | @{
|
---|
4181 | .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
|
---|
4182 | @{ *(.text) @}
|
---|
4183 | @}
|
---|
4184 | @end group
|
---|
4185 | @end smallexample
|
---|
4186 | @noindent
|
---|
4187 | will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
|
---|
4188 | address}.
|
---|
4189 |
|
---|
4190 | @node Expression Section
|
---|
4191 | @subsection The Section of an Expression
|
---|
4192 | @cindex expression sections
|
---|
4193 | @cindex absolute expressions
|
---|
4194 | @cindex relative expressions
|
---|
4195 | @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
|
---|
4196 | @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
|
---|
4197 | @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
|
---|
4198 | When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
|
---|
4199 | or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
|
---|
4200 | fixed offset from the base of a section.
|
---|
4201 |
|
---|
4202 | The position of the expression within the linker script determines
|
---|
4203 | whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
|
---|
4204 | an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
|
---|
4205 | section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
|
---|
4206 |
|
---|
4207 | A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
|
---|
4208 | relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
|
---|
4209 | further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
|
---|
4210 | section will be the section of the relative expression.
|
---|
4211 |
|
---|
4212 | A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
|
---|
4213 | through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
|
---|
4214 | will not have any particular associated section.
|
---|
4215 |
|
---|
4216 | You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
|
---|
4217 | to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
|
---|
4218 | create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
|
---|
4219 | section @samp{.data}:
|
---|
4220 | @smallexample
|
---|
4221 | SECTIONS
|
---|
4222 | @{
|
---|
4223 | .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
|
---|
4224 | @}
|
---|
4225 | @end smallexample
|
---|
4226 | @noindent
|
---|
4227 | If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
|
---|
4228 | @samp{.data} section.
|
---|
4229 |
|
---|
4230 | @node Builtin Functions
|
---|
4231 | @subsection Builtin Functions
|
---|
4232 | @cindex functions in expressions
|
---|
4233 | The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
|
---|
4234 | use in linker script expressions.
|
---|
4235 |
|
---|
4236 | @table @code
|
---|
4237 | @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
|
---|
4238 | @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
|
---|
4239 | @cindex expression, absolute
|
---|
4240 | Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
|
---|
4241 | of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
|
---|
4242 | value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
|
---|
4243 | normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
|
---|
4244 |
|
---|
4245 | @item ADDR(@var{section})
|
---|
4246 | @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
|
---|
4247 | @cindex section address in expression
|
---|
4248 | Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
|
---|
4249 | script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
|
---|
4250 | the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
|
---|
4251 | identical values:
|
---|
4252 | @smallexample
|
---|
4253 | @group
|
---|
4254 | SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
|
---|
4255 | .output1 :
|
---|
4256 | @{
|
---|
4257 | start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
|
---|
4258 | @dots{}
|
---|
4259 | @}
|
---|
4260 | .output :
|
---|
4261 | @{
|
---|
4262 | symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
|
---|
4263 | symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
|
---|
4264 | @}
|
---|
4265 | @dots{} @}
|
---|
4266 | @end group
|
---|
4267 | @end smallexample
|
---|
4268 |
|
---|
4269 | @item ALIGN(@var{exp})
|
---|
4270 | @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp})
|
---|
4271 | @cindex round up location counter
|
---|
4272 | @cindex align location counter
|
---|
4273 | Return the location counter (@code{.}) aligned to the next @var{exp}
|
---|
4274 | boundary.
|
---|
4275 | @code{ALIGN} doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just
|
---|
4276 | does arithmetic on it. Here is an example which aligns the output
|
---|
4277 | @code{.data} section to the next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the
|
---|
4278 | preceding section and sets a variable within the section to the next
|
---|
4279 | @code{0x8000} boundary after the input sections:
|
---|
4280 | @smallexample
|
---|
4281 | @group
|
---|
4282 | SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
|
---|
4283 | .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
|
---|
4284 | *(.data)
|
---|
4285 | variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
|
---|
4286 | @}
|
---|
4287 | @dots{} @}
|
---|
4288 | @end group
|
---|
4289 | @end smallexample
|
---|
4290 | @noindent
|
---|
4291 | The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
|
---|
4292 | a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
|
---|
4293 | a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
|
---|
4294 | of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
|
---|
4295 |
|
---|
4296 | The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
|
---|
4297 |
|
---|
4298 | @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
|
---|
4299 | @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
|
---|
4300 | This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
|
---|
4301 | scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
|
---|
4302 | section.
|
---|
4303 |
|
---|
4304 | @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
|
---|
4305 | @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
|
---|
4306 | This is equivalent to either
|
---|
4307 | @smallexample
|
---|
4308 | (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
|
---|
4309 | @end smallexample
|
---|
4310 | or
|
---|
4311 | @smallexample
|
---|
4312 | (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
|
---|
4313 | @end smallexample
|
---|
4314 | @noindent
|
---|
4315 | depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
|
---|
4316 | for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
|
---|
4317 | @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
|
---|
4318 | If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
|
---|
4319 | memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
|
---|
4320 | bytes in the on-disk file.
|
---|
4321 |
|
---|
4322 | This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
|
---|
4323 | any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
|
---|
4324 | @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
|
---|
4325 | be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
|
---|
4326 | working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
|
---|
4327 |
|
---|
4328 | @noindent
|
---|
4329 | Example:
|
---|
4330 | @smallexample
|
---|
4331 | . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
|
---|
4332 | @end smallexample
|
---|
4333 |
|
---|
4334 | @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
|
---|
4335 | @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
|
---|
4336 | This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
|
---|
4337 | evaluation purposes.
|
---|
4338 |
|
---|
4339 | @smallexample
|
---|
4340 | . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
|
---|
4341 | @end smallexample
|
---|
4342 |
|
---|
4343 | @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
|
---|
4344 | @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
|
---|
4345 | @cindex symbol defaults
|
---|
4346 | Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
|
---|
4347 | defined, otherwise return 0. You can use this function to provide
|
---|
4348 | default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
|
---|
4349 | shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
|
---|
4350 | the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
|
---|
4351 | existed, its value is preserved:
|
---|
4352 |
|
---|
4353 | @smallexample
|
---|
4354 | @group
|
---|
4355 | SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
|
---|
4356 | .text : @{
|
---|
4357 | begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
|
---|
4358 | @dots{}
|
---|
4359 | @}
|
---|
4360 | @dots{}
|
---|
4361 | @}
|
---|
4362 | @end group
|
---|
4363 | @end smallexample
|
---|
4364 |
|
---|
4365 | @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
|
---|
4366 | @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
|
---|
4367 | @cindex section load address in expression
|
---|
4368 | Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
|
---|
4369 | the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
|
---|
4370 | attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
|
---|
4371 | Section LMA}).
|
---|
4372 |
|
---|
4373 | @kindex MAX
|
---|
4374 | @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
|
---|
4375 | Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
|
---|
4376 |
|
---|
4377 | @kindex MIN
|
---|
4378 | @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
|
---|
4379 | Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
|
---|
4380 |
|
---|
4381 | @item NEXT(@var{exp})
|
---|
4382 | @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
|
---|
4383 | @cindex unallocated address, next
|
---|
4384 | Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
|
---|
4385 | This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
|
---|
4386 | use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
|
---|
4387 | output file, the two functions are equivalent.
|
---|
4388 |
|
---|
4389 | @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
|
---|
4390 | @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
|
---|
4391 | @cindex section size
|
---|
4392 | Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
|
---|
4393 | been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
|
---|
4394 | evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
|
---|
4395 | @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
|
---|
4396 | @smallexample
|
---|
4397 | @group
|
---|
4398 | SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
|
---|
4399 | .output @{
|
---|
4400 | .start = . ;
|
---|
4401 | @dots{}
|
---|
4402 | .end = . ;
|
---|
4403 | @}
|
---|
4404 | symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
|
---|
4405 | symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
|
---|
4406 | @dots{} @}
|
---|
4407 | @end group
|
---|
4408 | @end smallexample
|
---|
4409 |
|
---|
4410 | @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
|
---|
4411 | @itemx sizeof_headers
|
---|
4412 | @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
|
---|
4413 | @cindex header size
|
---|
4414 | Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
|
---|
4415 | information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
|
---|
4416 | this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
|
---|
4417 | choose, to facilitate paging.
|
---|
4418 |
|
---|
4419 | @cindex not enough room for program headers
|
---|
4420 | @cindex program headers, not enough room
|
---|
4421 | When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
|
---|
4422 | @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
|
---|
4423 | number of program headers before it has determined all the section
|
---|
4424 | addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
|
---|
4425 | additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
|
---|
4426 | room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
|
---|
4427 | the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
|
---|
4428 | script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
|
---|
4429 | you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
|
---|
4430 | command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
|
---|
4431 | @end table
|
---|
4432 |
|
---|
4433 | @node Implicit Linker Scripts
|
---|
4434 | @section Implicit Linker Scripts
|
---|
4435 | @cindex implicit linker scripts
|
---|
4436 | If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
|
---|
4437 | an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
|
---|
4438 | linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
|
---|
4439 | linker will report an error.
|
---|
4440 |
|
---|
4441 | An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
|
---|
4442 |
|
---|
4443 | Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
|
---|
4444 | assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
|
---|
4445 | commands.
|
---|
4446 |
|
---|
4447 | Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
|
---|
4448 | at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
|
---|
4449 | read. This can affect archive searching.
|
---|
4450 |
|
---|
4451 | @ifset GENERIC
|
---|
4452 | @node Machine Dependent
|
---|
4453 | @chapter Machine Dependent Features
|
---|
4454 |
|
---|
4455 | @cindex machine dependencies
|
---|
4456 | @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
|
---|
4457 | sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
|
---|
4458 | functionality are not listed.
|
---|
4459 |
|
---|
4460 | @menu
|
---|
4461 | @ifset H8300
|
---|
4462 | * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
|
---|
4463 | @end ifset
|
---|
4464 | @ifset I960
|
---|
4465 | * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
|
---|
4466 | @end ifset
|
---|
4467 | @ifset ARM
|
---|
4468 | * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
|
---|
4469 | @end ifset
|
---|
4470 | @ifset HPPA
|
---|
4471 | * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
|
---|
4472 | @end ifset
|
---|
4473 | @ifset MMIX
|
---|
4474 | * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
|
---|
4475 | @end ifset
|
---|
4476 | @ifset MSP430
|
---|
4477 | * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
|
---|
4478 | @end ifset
|
---|
4479 | @ifset TICOFF
|
---|
4480 | * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
|
---|
4481 | @end ifset
|
---|
4482 | @ifset WIN32
|
---|
4483 | * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
|
---|
4484 | @end ifset
|
---|
4485 | @ifset XTENSA
|
---|
4486 | * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
|
---|
4487 | @end ifset
|
---|
4488 | @end menu
|
---|
4489 | @end ifset
|
---|
4490 |
|
---|
4491 | @ifset H8300
|
---|
4492 | @ifclear GENERIC
|
---|
4493 | @raisesections
|
---|
4494 | @end ifclear
|
---|
4495 |
|
---|
4496 | @node H8/300
|
---|
4497 | @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
|
---|
4498 |
|
---|
4499 | @cindex H8/300 support
|
---|
4500 | For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
|
---|
4501 | you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
|
---|
4502 |
|
---|
4503 | @table @emph
|
---|
4504 | @cindex relaxing on H8/300
|
---|
4505 | @item relaxing address modes
|
---|
4506 | @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
|
---|
4507 | targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
|
---|
4508 | program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
|
---|
4509 | respectively.
|
---|
4510 |
|
---|
4511 | @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
|
---|
4512 | @item synthesizing instructions
|
---|
4513 | @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
|
---|
4514 | @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
|
---|
4515 | sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
|
---|
4516 | page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
|
---|
4517 | (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
|
---|
4518 | @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
|
---|
4519 | top page of memory).
|
---|
4520 | @end table
|
---|
4521 |
|
---|
4522 | @ifclear GENERIC
|
---|
4523 | @lowersections
|
---|
4524 | @end ifclear
|
---|
4525 | @end ifset
|
---|
4526 |
|
---|
4527 | @ifclear GENERIC
|
---|
4528 | @ifset Renesas
|
---|
4529 | @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
|
---|
4530 | @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
|
---|
4531 | @node Renesas
|
---|
4532 | @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
|
---|
4533 |
|
---|
4534 | @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
|
---|
4535 | H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
|
---|
4536 | options are required for these chips.
|
---|
4537 | @end ifset
|
---|
4538 | @end ifclear
|
---|
4539 |
|
---|
4540 | @ifset I960
|
---|
4541 | @ifclear GENERIC
|
---|
4542 | @raisesections
|
---|
4543 | @end ifclear
|
---|
4544 |
|
---|
4545 | @node i960
|
---|
4546 | @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
|
---|
4547 |
|
---|
4548 | @cindex i960 support
|
---|
4549 |
|
---|
4550 | You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
|
---|
4551 | specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
|
---|
4552 | family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
|
---|
4553 | incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
|
---|
4554 | linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
|
---|
4555 | libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
|
---|
4556 | search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
|
---|
4557 |
|
---|
4558 | For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
|
---|
4559 | well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
|
---|
4560 | paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
|
---|
4561 | the names
|
---|
4562 |
|
---|
4563 | @smallexample
|
---|
4564 | @group
|
---|
4565 | try
|
---|
4566 | libtry.a
|
---|
4567 | tryca
|
---|
4568 | libtryca.a
|
---|
4569 | @end group
|
---|
4570 | @end smallexample
|
---|
4571 |
|
---|
4572 | @noindent
|
---|
4573 | The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
|
---|
4574 | two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
|
---|
4575 |
|
---|
4576 | You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
|
---|
4577 | the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
|
---|
4578 | use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
|
---|
4579 | specifies a library.
|
---|
4580 |
|
---|
4581 | @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
|
---|
4582 | @cindex relaxing on i960
|
---|
4583 | @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
|
---|
4584 | you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
|
---|
4585 | @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
|
---|
4586 | them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
|
---|
4587 | instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
|
---|
4588 | instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
|
---|
4589 | target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
|
---|
4590 | not itself call any subroutines).
|
---|
4591 |
|
---|
4592 | @ifclear GENERIC
|
---|
4593 | @lowersections
|
---|
4594 | @end ifclear
|
---|
4595 | @end ifset
|
---|
4596 |
|
---|
4597 | @ifset ARM
|
---|
4598 | @ifclear GENERIC
|
---|
4599 | @raisesections
|
---|
4600 | @end ifclear
|
---|
4601 |
|
---|
4602 | @node ARM
|
---|
4603 | @section @command{ld}'s Support for Interworking Between ARM and Thumb Code
|
---|
4604 |
|
---|
4605 | @cindex ARM interworking support
|
---|
4606 | @kindex --support-old-code
|
---|
4607 | For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
|
---|
4608 | betweem ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
|
---|
4609 | been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
|
---|
4610 | line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
|
---|
4611 | libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
|
---|
4612 | option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
|
---|
4613 | given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
|
---|
4614 | which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
|
---|
4615 | the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
|
---|
4616 | non-interworking aware Thumb code.
|
---|
4617 |
|
---|
4618 | @cindex thumb entry point
|
---|
4619 | @cindex entry point, thumb
|
---|
4620 | @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
|
---|
4621 | The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
|
---|
4622 | @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
|
---|
4623 | But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
|
---|
4624 | branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
|
---|
4625 | executing in Thumb mode straight away.
|
---|
4626 |
|
---|
4627 | @ifclear GENERIC
|
---|
4628 | @lowersections
|
---|
4629 | @end ifclear
|
---|
4630 | @end ifset
|
---|
4631 |
|
---|
4632 | @ifset HPPA
|
---|
4633 | @ifclear GENERIC
|
---|
4634 | @raisesections
|
---|
4635 | @end ifclear
|
---|
4636 |
|
---|
4637 | @node HPPA ELF32
|
---|
4638 | @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
|
---|
4639 | @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
|
---|
4640 | @kindex --multi-subspace
|
---|
4641 | When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
|
---|
4642 | import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
|
---|
4643 | The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
|
---|
4644 | stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
|
---|
4645 | multiple sub-spaces.
|
---|
4646 |
|
---|
4647 | @cindex HPPA stub grouping
|
---|
4648 | @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
|
---|
4649 | Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
|
---|
4650 | stub sections located between groups of input sections.
|
---|
4651 | @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
|
---|
4652 | sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
|
---|
4653 | a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
|
---|
4654 | the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
|
---|
4655 | conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
|
---|
4656 | prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
|
---|
4657 | A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
|
---|
4658 | branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
|
---|
4659 | @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
|
---|
4660 | @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
|
---|
4661 | detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
|
---|
4662 | positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
|
---|
4663 |
|
---|
4664 | Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
|
---|
4665 | single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
|
---|
4666 | create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
|
---|
4667 | large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
|
---|
4668 |
|
---|
4669 | @ifclear GENERIC
|
---|
4670 | @lowersections
|
---|
4671 | @end ifclear
|
---|
4672 | @end ifset
|
---|
4673 |
|
---|
4674 | @ifset MMIX
|
---|
4675 | @ifclear GENERIC
|
---|
4676 | @raisesections
|
---|
4677 | @end ifclear
|
---|
4678 |
|
---|
4679 | @node MMIX
|
---|
4680 | @section @code{ld} and MMIX
|
---|
4681 | For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
|
---|
4682 | @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
|
---|
4683 | understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
|
---|
4684 | can translate between the two formats.
|
---|
4685 |
|
---|
4686 | There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
|
---|
4687 | Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
|
---|
4688 | registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
|
---|
4689 | equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
|
---|
4690 | @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
|
---|
4691 | global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
|
---|
4692 | this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
|
---|
4693 | symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
|
---|
4694 |
|
---|
4695 | Symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
|
---|
4696 | @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special;
|
---|
4697 | there must be only one each, even if they are local. The default linker
|
---|
4698 | script uses these to set the default start address of a section.
|
---|
4699 |
|
---|
4700 | Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
|
---|
4701 | are left out from an mmo file.
|
---|
4702 |
|
---|
4703 | @ifclear GENERIC
|
---|
4704 | @lowersections
|
---|
4705 | @end ifclear
|
---|
4706 | @end ifset
|
---|
4707 |
|
---|
4708 | @ifset MSP430
|
---|
4709 | @ifclear GENERIC
|
---|
4710 | @raisesections
|
---|
4711 | @end ifclear
|
---|
4712 |
|
---|
4713 | @node MSP430
|
---|
4714 | @section @code{ld} and MSP430
|
---|
4715 | For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
|
---|
4716 | will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
|
---|
4717 | just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
|
---|
4718 |
|
---|
4719 | @cindex MSP430 extra sections
|
---|
4720 | The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
|
---|
4721 |
|
---|
4722 | @table @code
|
---|
4723 | @item @samp{.vectors}
|
---|
4724 | Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
|
---|
4725 |
|
---|
4726 | @item @samp{.bootloader}
|
---|
4727 | Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
|
---|
4728 | in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
|
---|
4729 |
|
---|
4730 | @item @samp{.infomem}
|
---|
4731 | Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
|
---|
4732 | this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
|
---|
4733 |
|
---|
4734 | @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
|
---|
4735 | This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
|
---|
4736 | in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
|
---|
4737 |
|
---|
4738 | @item @samp{.noinit}
|
---|
4739 | Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
|
---|
4740 |
|
---|
4741 | The last two sections are used by gcc.
|
---|
4742 | @end table
|
---|
4743 |
|
---|
4744 | @ifclear GENERIC
|
---|
4745 | @lowersections
|
---|
4746 | @end ifclear
|
---|
4747 | @end ifset
|
---|
4748 |
|
---|
4749 | @ifset TICOFF
|
---|
4750 | @ifclear GENERIC
|
---|
4751 | @raisesections
|
---|
4752 | @end ifclear
|
---|
4753 |
|
---|
4754 | @node TI COFF
|
---|
4755 | @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
|
---|
4756 | @cindex TI COFF versions
|
---|
4757 | @kindex --format=@var{version}
|
---|
4758 | The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
|
---|
4759 | TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
|
---|
4760 | also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
|
---|
4761 | format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
|
---|
4762 | header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
|
---|
4763 |
|
---|
4764 | @ifclear GENERIC
|
---|
4765 | @lowersections
|
---|
4766 | @end ifclear
|
---|
4767 | @end ifset
|
---|
4768 |
|
---|
4769 | @ifset WIN32
|
---|
4770 | @ifclear GENERIC
|
---|
4771 | @raisesections
|
---|
4772 | @end ifclear
|
---|
4773 |
|
---|
4774 | @node WIN32
|
---|
4775 | @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
|
---|
4776 |
|
---|
4777 | This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
|
---|
4778 | See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed decription of the
|
---|
4779 | command line options mentioned here.
|
---|
4780 |
|
---|
4781 | @table @emph
|
---|
4782 | @cindex import libraries
|
---|
4783 | @item import libraries
|
---|
4784 | The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
|
---|
4785 | libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
|
---|
4786 | regular static archives and are handled as any other static
|
---|
4787 | archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
|
---|
4788 | support for creating such libraries provided with the
|
---|
4789 | @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
|
---|
4790 |
|
---|
4791 | @item exporting DLL symbols
|
---|
4792 | @cindex exporting DLL symbols
|
---|
4793 | The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
|
---|
4794 |
|
---|
4795 | @table @emph
|
---|
4796 | @item using auto-export functionality
|
---|
4797 | @cindex using auto-export functionality
|
---|
4798 | By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
|
---|
4799 | which is controlled by the following command line options:
|
---|
4800 |
|
---|
4801 | @itemize
|
---|
4802 | @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
|
---|
4803 | @item --exclude-symbols
|
---|
4804 | @item --exclude-libs
|
---|
4805 | @end itemize
|
---|
4806 |
|
---|
4807 | If, however, @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
|
---|
4808 | command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
|
---|
4809 | if either of the following are true:
|
---|
4810 |
|
---|
4811 | @itemize
|
---|
4812 | @item A DEF file is used.
|
---|
4813 | @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
|
---|
4814 | @end itemize
|
---|
4815 |
|
---|
4816 | @item using a DEF file
|
---|
4817 | @cindex using a DEF file
|
---|
4818 | Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
|
---|
4819 | an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
|
---|
4820 | exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
|
---|
4821 | name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
|
---|
4822 | command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
|
---|
4823 |
|
---|
4824 | @example
|
---|
4825 | gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
|
---|
4826 | @end example
|
---|
4827 |
|
---|
4828 | Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
|
---|
4829 | @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
|
---|
4830 |
|
---|
4831 | Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
|
---|
4832 |
|
---|
4833 | @example
|
---|
4834 | LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x10000000
|
---|
4835 |
|
---|
4836 | EXPORTS
|
---|
4837 | foo
|
---|
4838 | bar
|
---|
4839 | _bar = bar
|
---|
4840 | @end example
|
---|
4841 |
|
---|
4842 | This example defines a base address and three symbols. The third
|
---|
4843 | symbol is an alias for the second. For the complete format
|
---|
4844 | specification see ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources.
|
---|
4845 |
|
---|
4846 | @cindex creating a DEF file
|
---|
4847 | While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
|
---|
4848 | with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
|
---|
4849 |
|
---|
4850 | @item Using decorations
|
---|
4851 | @cindex Using decorations
|
---|
4852 | Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
|
---|
4853 | itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
|
---|
4854 | declared as:
|
---|
4855 |
|
---|
4856 | @example
|
---|
4857 | __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
|
---|
4858 | __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
|
---|
4859 | @end example
|
---|
4860 |
|
---|
4861 | All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
|
---|
4862 | any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
|
---|
4863 | this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
|
---|
4864 | the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
|
---|
4865 |
|
---|
4866 | Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
|
---|
4867 | decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
|
---|
4868 | instead:
|
---|
4869 |
|
---|
4870 | @example
|
---|
4871 | __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
|
---|
4872 | __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
|
---|
4873 | @end example
|
---|
4874 |
|
---|
4875 | This complicates the structure of library header files, because
|
---|
4876 | when included by the library itself the header must declare the
|
---|
4877 | variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
|
---|
4878 | code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
|
---|
4879 | of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
|
---|
4880 | omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
|
---|
4881 | @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
|
---|
4882 | imformation.
|
---|
4883 | @end table
|
---|
4884 |
|
---|
4885 | @cindex automatic data imports
|
---|
4886 | @item automatic data imports
|
---|
4887 | The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
|
---|
4888 | by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
|
---|
4889 | compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
|
---|
4890 | issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
|
---|
4891 | code to these platforms, especially for large
|
---|
4892 | c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
|
---|
4893 | initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
|
---|
4894 | decorations to archieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
|
---|
4895 | platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
|
---|
4896 | command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
|
---|
4897 | The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
|
---|
4898 | suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
|
---|
4899 | trigger the feature's use.
|
---|
4900 |
|
---|
4901 | auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
|
---|
4902 | additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
|
---|
4903 |
|
---|
4904 | "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
|
---|
4905 | documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
|
---|
4906 |
|
---|
4907 | The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
|
---|
4908 | occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
|
---|
4909 | One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
|
---|
4910 | below.
|
---|
4911 |
|
---|
4912 | @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
|
---|
4913 | For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
|
---|
4914 | object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
|
---|
4915 | offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
|
---|
4916 | field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
|
---|
4917 | in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
|
---|
4918 | without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
|
---|
4919 | The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
|
---|
4920 | references.
|
---|
4921 |
|
---|
4922 | The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
|
---|
4923 | be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
|
---|
4924 | themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
|
---|
4925 | runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
|
---|
4926 | compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
|
---|
4927 | support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
|
---|
4928 | run without error on an older system.
|
---|
4929 |
|
---|
4930 | @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
|
---|
4931 | enabled as needed.
|
---|
4932 |
|
---|
4933 | @cindex direct linking to a dll
|
---|
4934 | @item direct linking to a dll
|
---|
4935 | The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
|
---|
4936 | including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
|
---|
4937 | libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
|
---|
4938 | traditional import library method, expecially when linking large
|
---|
4939 | libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
|
---|
4940 | function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
|
---|
4941 | though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
|
---|
4942 | storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
|
---|
4943 | tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
|
---|
4944 | large or complex libraries when using import libs.
|
---|
4945 |
|
---|
4946 | Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
|
---|
4947 | @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
|
---|
4948 | of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
|
---|
4949 | perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
|
---|
4950 | select the dll instead of an import library.
|
---|
4951 |
|
---|
4952 |
|
---|
4953 | For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
|
---|
4954 | to find, in the first directory of its search path,
|
---|
4955 |
|
---|
4956 | @example
|
---|
4957 | libxxx.dll.a
|
---|
4958 | xxx.dll.a
|
---|
4959 | libxxx.a
|
---|
4960 | cygxxx.dll (*)
|
---|
4961 | libxxx.dll
|
---|
4962 | xxx.dll
|
---|
4963 | @end example
|
---|
4964 |
|
---|
4965 | before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
|
---|
4966 |
|
---|
4967 | (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
|
---|
4968 | where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
|
---|
4969 | @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
|
---|
4970 | file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
|
---|
4971 | @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
|
---|
4972 |
|
---|
4973 | Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
|
---|
4974 | @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
|
---|
4975 | was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
|
---|
4976 | various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
|
---|
4977 | could coexist on the same machine.
|
---|
4978 |
|
---|
4979 | The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
|
---|
4980 | applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
|
---|
4981 | libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
|
---|
4982 |
|
---|
4983 | @example
|
---|
4984 | bin/
|
---|
4985 | cygxxx.dll
|
---|
4986 | lib/
|
---|
4987 | libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
|
---|
4988 | libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
|
---|
4989 | @end example
|
---|
4990 |
|
---|
4991 | Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
|
---|
4992 | done two ways:
|
---|
4993 |
|
---|
4994 | 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
|
---|
4995 | @example
|
---|
4996 | gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
|
---|
4997 | @end example
|
---|
4998 |
|
---|
4999 | However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
|
---|
5000 | (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
|
---|
5001 | @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
|
---|
5002 | not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
|
---|
5003 |
|
---|
5004 | 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
|
---|
5005 | directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
|
---|
5006 | should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
|
---|
5007 | making the app/dll.
|
---|
5008 |
|
---|
5009 | @example
|
---|
5010 | ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
|
---|
5011 | @end example
|
---|
5012 |
|
---|
5013 | Then you can link without any make environment changes.
|
---|
5014 |
|
---|
5015 | @example
|
---|
5016 | gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
|
---|
5017 | @end example
|
---|
5018 |
|
---|
5019 | This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
|
---|
5020 | perfectly legal
|
---|
5021 |
|
---|
5022 | @example
|
---|
5023 | bin/
|
---|
5024 | cygxxx-5.dll
|
---|
5025 | lib/
|
---|
5026 | libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
|
---|
5027 | @end example
|
---|
5028 |
|
---|
5029 | Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
|
---|
5030 | even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
|
---|
5031 | @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
|
---|
5032 |
|
---|
5033 | Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
|
---|
5034 | wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are two reasons:
|
---|
5035 |
|
---|
5036 | 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
|
---|
5037 | work with auto-imported data.
|
---|
5038 |
|
---|
5039 | 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
|
---|
5040 | import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
|
---|
5041 | symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
|
---|
5042 | for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
|
---|
5043 | possible to do this without an import lib.
|
---|
5044 |
|
---|
5045 | So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
|
---|
5046 | true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
|
---|
5047 | a dll, in most cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
|
---|
5048 | binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
|
---|
5049 | massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
|
---|
5050 | requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
|
---|
5051 | will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
|
---|
5052 |
|
---|
5053 | @item symbol aliasing
|
---|
5054 | @table @emph
|
---|
5055 | @item adding additional names
|
---|
5056 | Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
|
---|
5057 | A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
|
---|
5058 | exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
|
---|
5059 | when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
|
---|
5060 | import library. Consider the following DEF file:
|
---|
5061 |
|
---|
5062 | @example
|
---|
5063 | LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
|
---|
5064 |
|
---|
5065 | EXPORTS
|
---|
5066 | foo
|
---|
5067 | _foo = foo
|
---|
5068 | @end example
|
---|
5069 |
|
---|
5070 | The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
|
---|
5071 |
|
---|
5072 | Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
|
---|
5073 | source code using the "weak" attribute:
|
---|
5074 |
|
---|
5075 | @example
|
---|
5076 | void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
|
---|
5077 | void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
|
---|
5078 | @end example
|
---|
5079 |
|
---|
5080 | See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
|
---|
5081 | symbols.
|
---|
5082 |
|
---|
5083 | @item renaming symbols
|
---|
5084 | Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
|
---|
5085 | kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
|
---|
5086 | @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
|
---|
5087 | DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
|
---|
5088 | created). In the following example:
|
---|
5089 |
|
---|
5090 | @example
|
---|
5091 | LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
|
---|
5092 |
|
---|
5093 | EXPORTS
|
---|
5094 | _foo = foo
|
---|
5095 | @end example
|
---|
5096 |
|
---|
5097 | The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
|
---|
5098 | @samp{_foo}.
|
---|
5099 | @end table
|
---|
5100 |
|
---|
5101 | Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
|
---|
5102 | unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
|
---|
5103 | If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
|
---|
5104 | @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
|
---|
5105 | that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
|
---|
5106 | @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
|
---|
5107 | renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
|
---|
5108 | to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
|
---|
5109 | the original names for the the renamed symbols will be exported.
|
---|
5110 | In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
|
---|
5111 | which is probably not what you wanted.
|
---|
5112 | @end table
|
---|
5113 |
|
---|
5114 | @ifclear GENERIC
|
---|
5115 | @lowersections
|
---|
5116 | @end ifclear
|
---|
5117 | @end ifset
|
---|
5118 |
|
---|
5119 | @ifset XTENSA
|
---|
5120 | @ifclear GENERIC
|
---|
5121 | @raisesections
|
---|
5122 | @end ifclear
|
---|
5123 |
|
---|
5124 | @node Xtensa
|
---|
5125 | @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
|
---|
5126 |
|
---|
5127 | @cindex Xtensa processors
|
---|
5128 | The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
|
---|
5129 | @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
|
---|
5130 | specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
|
---|
5131 | keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
|
---|
5132 | example, with the command:
|
---|
5133 |
|
---|
5134 | @smallexample
|
---|
5135 | SECTIONS
|
---|
5136 | @{
|
---|
5137 | .text : @{
|
---|
5138 | *(.literal .text)
|
---|
5139 | @}
|
---|
5140 | @}
|
---|
5141 | @end smallexample
|
---|
5142 |
|
---|
5143 | @noindent
|
---|
5144 | @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
|
---|
5145 | and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
|
---|
5146 | literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
|
---|
5147 | interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
|
---|
5148 | group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
|
---|
5149 | files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
|
---|
5150 | and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
|
---|
5151 | The non-interleaved order can still be specified as:
|
---|
5152 |
|
---|
5153 | @smallexample
|
---|
5154 | SECTIONS
|
---|
5155 | @{
|
---|
5156 | .text : @{
|
---|
5157 | *(.literal) *(.text)
|
---|
5158 | @}
|
---|
5159 | @}
|
---|
5160 | @end smallexample
|
---|
5161 |
|
---|
5162 | @cindex @code{--relax} on Xtensa
|
---|
5163 | @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
|
---|
5164 | @kindex --no-relax
|
---|
5165 | The Xtensa version of @command{ld} enables the @option{--relax} option by
|
---|
5166 | default to attempt to reduce space in the output image by combining
|
---|
5167 | literals with identical values. It also provides the
|
---|
5168 | @option{--no-relax} option to disable this optimization. When enabled,
|
---|
5169 | the relaxation algorithm ensures that a literal will only be merged with
|
---|
5170 | another literal when the new merged literal location is within the
|
---|
5171 | offset range of all of its uses.
|
---|
5172 |
|
---|
5173 | The relaxation mechanism will also attempt to optimize
|
---|
5174 | assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
|
---|
5175 | @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target is known to fit into a
|
---|
5176 | @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction encoding. The current optimization
|
---|
5177 | converts the sequence into @code{NOP}/@code{CALL@var{n}} and removes the
|
---|
5178 | literal referenced by the @code{L32R} instruction.
|
---|
5179 |
|
---|
5180 | @ifclear GENERIC
|
---|
5181 | @lowersections
|
---|
5182 | @end ifclear
|
---|
5183 | @end ifset
|
---|
5184 |
|
---|
5185 | @ifclear SingleFormat
|
---|
5186 | @node BFD
|
---|
5187 | @chapter BFD
|
---|
5188 |
|
---|
5189 | @cindex back end
|
---|
5190 | @cindex object file management
|
---|
5191 | @cindex object formats available
|
---|
5192 | @kindex objdump -i
|
---|
5193 | The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
|
---|
5194 | These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
|
---|
5195 | object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
|
---|
5196 | format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
|
---|
5197 | it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
|
---|
5198 | associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
|
---|
5199 | object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
|
---|
5200 | (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
|
---|
5201 | list all the formats available for your configuration.
|
---|
5202 |
|
---|
5203 | @cindex BFD requirements
|
---|
5204 | @cindex requirements for BFD
|
---|
5205 | As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
|
---|
5206 | several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
|
---|
5207 | BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
|
---|
5208 | formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
|
---|
5209 | been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
|
---|
5210 | BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
|
---|
5211 | may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
|
---|
5212 |
|
---|
5213 | One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
|
---|
5214 | mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
|
---|
5215 | useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
|
---|
5216 | conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
|
---|
5217 |
|
---|
5218 | @menu
|
---|
5219 | * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
|
---|
5220 | @end menu
|
---|
5221 |
|
---|
5222 | @node BFD outline
|
---|
5223 | @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
|
---|
5224 | @cindex opening object files
|
---|
5225 | @include bfdsumm.texi
|
---|
5226 | @end ifclear
|
---|
5227 |
|
---|
5228 | @node Reporting Bugs
|
---|
5229 | @chapter Reporting Bugs
|
---|
5230 | @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
|
---|
5231 | @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
|
---|
5232 |
|
---|
5233 | Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
|
---|
5234 |
|
---|
5235 | Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
|
---|
5236 | it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
|
---|
5237 | to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
|
---|
5238 | work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
|
---|
5239 | @command{ld}.
|
---|
5240 |
|
---|
5241 | In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
|
---|
5242 | information that enables us to fix the bug.
|
---|
5243 |
|
---|
5244 | @menu
|
---|
5245 | * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
|
---|
5246 | * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
|
---|
5247 | @end menu
|
---|
5248 |
|
---|
5249 | @node Bug Criteria
|
---|
5250 | @section Have You Found a Bug?
|
---|
5251 | @cindex bug criteria
|
---|
5252 |
|
---|
5253 | If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
|
---|
5254 |
|
---|
5255 | @itemize @bullet
|
---|
5256 | @cindex fatal signal
|
---|
5257 | @cindex linker crash
|
---|
5258 | @cindex crash of linker
|
---|
5259 | @item
|
---|
5260 | If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
|
---|
5261 | @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
|
---|
5262 |
|
---|
5263 | @cindex error on valid input
|
---|
5264 | @item
|
---|
5265 | If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
|
---|
5266 |
|
---|
5267 | @cindex invalid input
|
---|
5268 | @item
|
---|
5269 | If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
|
---|
5270 | may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
|
---|
5271 | object files are correct.
|
---|
5272 |
|
---|
5273 | @item
|
---|
5274 | If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
|
---|
5275 | improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
|
---|
5276 | @end itemize
|
---|
5277 |
|
---|
5278 | @node Bug Reporting
|
---|
5279 | @section How to Report Bugs
|
---|
5280 | @cindex bug reports
|
---|
5281 | @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
|
---|
5282 |
|
---|
5283 | A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
|
---|
5284 | products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
|
---|
5285 | recommend you contact that organization first.
|
---|
5286 |
|
---|
5287 | You can find contact information for many support companies and
|
---|
5288 | individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
|
---|
5289 | distribution.
|
---|
5290 |
|
---|
5291 | Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
|
---|
5292 | @samp{bug-binutils@@gnu.org}.
|
---|
5293 |
|
---|
5294 | The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
|
---|
5295 | @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
|
---|
5296 | fact or leave it out, state it!
|
---|
5297 |
|
---|
5298 | Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
|
---|
5299 | problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
|
---|
5300 | assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
|
---|
5301 | matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
|
---|
5302 | the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
|
---|
5303 | location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
|
---|
5304 | were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
|
---|
5305 | into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
|
---|
5306 | specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
|
---|
5307 | and the most helpful.
|
---|
5308 |
|
---|
5309 | Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
|
---|
5310 | the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
|
---|
5311 | on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
|
---|
5312 |
|
---|
5313 | Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
|
---|
5314 | bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
|
---|
5315 | respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
|
---|
5316 | You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
|
---|
5317 |
|
---|
5318 | To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
|
---|
5319 |
|
---|
5320 | @itemize @bullet
|
---|
5321 | @item
|
---|
5322 | The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
|
---|
5323 | the @samp{--version} argument.
|
---|
5324 |
|
---|
5325 | Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
|
---|
5326 | the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
|
---|
5327 |
|
---|
5328 | @item
|
---|
5329 | Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
|
---|
5330 | patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
|
---|
5331 |
|
---|
5332 | @item
|
---|
5333 | The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
|
---|
5334 | version number.
|
---|
5335 |
|
---|
5336 | @item
|
---|
5337 | What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
|
---|
5338 | ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
|
---|
5339 |
|
---|
5340 | @item
|
---|
5341 | The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
|
---|
5342 | observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
|
---|
5343 | list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
|
---|
5344 | sufficient.
|
---|
5345 |
|
---|
5346 | If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
|
---|
5347 | and then we might not encounter the bug.
|
---|
5348 |
|
---|
5349 | @item
|
---|
5350 | A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
|
---|
5351 | bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
|
---|
5352 | provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
|
---|
5353 | bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
|
---|
5354 | state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
|
---|
5355 | requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
|
---|
5356 | we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
|
---|
5357 | attachments are best.
|
---|
5358 |
|
---|
5359 | If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
|
---|
5360 | @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
|
---|
5361 | object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
|
---|
5362 | @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
|
---|
5363 | how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
|
---|
5364 |
|
---|
5365 | @item
|
---|
5366 | A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
|
---|
5367 | incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
|
---|
5368 |
|
---|
5369 | Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
|
---|
5370 | will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
|
---|
5371 | not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
|
---|
5372 | a chance to make a mistake.
|
---|
5373 |
|
---|
5374 | Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
|
---|
5375 | say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
|
---|
5376 | copy of @command{ld} is out of synch, or you have encountered a bug in the
|
---|
5377 | C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
|
---|
5378 | and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
|
---|
5379 | fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
|
---|
5380 | you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
|
---|
5381 | any conclusion from our observations.
|
---|
5382 |
|
---|
5383 | @item
|
---|
5384 | If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
|
---|
5385 | diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
|
---|
5386 | @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
|
---|
5387 | If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
|
---|
5388 | context, not by line number.
|
---|
5389 |
|
---|
5390 | The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
|
---|
5391 | sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
|
---|
5392 | @end itemize
|
---|
5393 |
|
---|
5394 | Here are some things that are not necessary:
|
---|
5395 |
|
---|
5396 | @itemize @bullet
|
---|
5397 | @item
|
---|
5398 | A description of the envelope of the bug.
|
---|
5399 |
|
---|
5400 | Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
|
---|
5401 | which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
|
---|
5402 | changes will not affect it.
|
---|
5403 |
|
---|
5404 | This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
|
---|
5405 | will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
|
---|
5406 | with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
|
---|
5407 | We recommend that you save your time for something else.
|
---|
5408 |
|
---|
5409 | Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
|
---|
5410 | of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
|
---|
5411 | output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
|
---|
5412 | less time, and so on.
|
---|
5413 |
|
---|
5414 | However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
|
---|
5415 | report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
|
---|
5416 |
|
---|
5417 | @item
|
---|
5418 | A patch for the bug.
|
---|
5419 |
|
---|
5420 | A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
|
---|
5421 | the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
|
---|
5422 | a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
|
---|
5423 | to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
|
---|
5424 |
|
---|
5425 | Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
|
---|
5426 | construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
|
---|
5427 | through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
|
---|
5428 | able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
|
---|
5429 | fixed.
|
---|
5430 |
|
---|
5431 | And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
|
---|
5432 | patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
|
---|
5433 | help us to understand.
|
---|
5434 |
|
---|
5435 | @item
|
---|
5436 | A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
|
---|
5437 |
|
---|
5438 | Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
|
---|
5439 | things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
|
---|
5440 | @end itemize
|
---|
5441 |
|
---|
5442 | @node MRI
|
---|
5443 | @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
|
---|
5444 | @cindex MRI compatibility
|
---|
5445 | To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
|
---|
5446 | linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
|
---|
5447 | alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
|
---|
5448 | described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
|
---|
5449 | simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
|
---|
5450 | @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
|
---|
5451 | linker commands; these commands are described here.
|
---|
5452 |
|
---|
5453 | In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
|
---|
5454 | file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
|
---|
5455 | features to make use of them.
|
---|
5456 |
|
---|
5457 | You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
|
---|
5458 | @samp{-c} command-line option.
|
---|
5459 |
|
---|
5460 | Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
|
---|
5461 | command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
|
---|
5462 | blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
|
---|
5463 | MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
|
---|
5464 | issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
|
---|
5465 |
|
---|
5466 | Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
|
---|
5467 |
|
---|
5468 | You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
|
---|
5469 | lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
|
---|
5470 | The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
|
---|
5471 |
|
---|
5472 | @table @code
|
---|
5473 | @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
|
---|
5474 | @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
|
---|
5475 | @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
|
---|
5476 | Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
|
---|
5477 | the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
|
---|
5478 | @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
|
---|
5479 | your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
|
---|
5480 | script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
|
---|
5481 | commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
|
---|
5482 | input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
|
---|
5483 | @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
|
---|
5484 |
|
---|
5485 | @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
|
---|
5486 | @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
|
---|
5487 | Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
|
---|
5488 | in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
|
---|
5489 |
|
---|
5490 | @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
|
---|
5491 |
|
---|
5492 | @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
|
---|
5493 | @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
|
---|
5494 | Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
|
---|
5495 | @var{expression} should be a power of two.
|
---|
5496 |
|
---|
5497 | @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
|
---|
5498 | @item BASE @var{expression}
|
---|
5499 | Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
|
---|
5500 | absolute addresses) in the output file.
|
---|
5501 |
|
---|
5502 | @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
|
---|
5503 | @item CHIP @var{expression}
|
---|
5504 | @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
|
---|
5505 | This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
|
---|
5506 |
|
---|
5507 | @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
|
---|
5508 | @item END
|
---|
5509 | This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
|
---|
5510 |
|
---|
5511 | @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
|
---|
5512 | @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
|
---|
5513 | Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
|
---|
5514 | language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
|
---|
5515 |
|
---|
5516 | @enumerate
|
---|
5517 | @item
|
---|
5518 | S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
|
---|
5519 |
|
---|
5520 | @item
|
---|
5521 | IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
|
---|
5522 |
|
---|
5523 | @item
|
---|
5524 | COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
|
---|
5525 | @samp{COFF}
|
---|
5526 | @end enumerate
|
---|
5527 |
|
---|
5528 | @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
|
---|
5529 | @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
|
---|
5530 | Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
|
---|
5531 | @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
|
---|
5532 |
|
---|
5533 | The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
|
---|
5534 | same line, with no change in its effect.
|
---|
5535 |
|
---|
5536 | @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
|
---|
5537 | @item LOAD @var{filename}
|
---|
5538 | @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
|
---|
5539 | Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
|
---|
5540 | same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
|
---|
5541 | command line.
|
---|
5542 |
|
---|
5543 | @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
|
---|
5544 | @item NAME @var{output-name}
|
---|
5545 | @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
|
---|
5546 | MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
|
---|
5547 | option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
|
---|
5548 |
|
---|
5549 | @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
|
---|
5550 | @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
|
---|
5551 | @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
|
---|
5552 | Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
|
---|
5553 | order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
|
---|
5554 | script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
|
---|
5555 | sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
|
---|
5556 | file, in the order specified.
|
---|
5557 |
|
---|
5558 | @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
|
---|
5559 | @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
|
---|
5560 | @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
|
---|
5561 | @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
|
---|
5562 | Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
|
---|
5563 | @var{name} used in the linker input files.
|
---|
5564 |
|
---|
5565 | @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
|
---|
5566 | @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
|
---|
5567 | @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
|
---|
5568 | @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
|
---|
5569 | You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
|
---|
5570 | specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
|
---|
5571 | If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
|
---|
5572 | @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
|
---|
5573 | @end table
|
---|
5574 |
|
---|
5575 | @include fdl.texi
|
---|
5576 |
|
---|
5577 | @node Index
|
---|
5578 | @unnumbered Index
|
---|
5579 |
|
---|
5580 | @printindex cp
|
---|
5581 |
|
---|
5582 | @tex
|
---|
5583 | % I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
|
---|
5584 | % meantime:
|
---|
5585 | \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
|
---|
5586 | \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
|
---|
5587 | \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
|
---|
5588 | \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
|
---|
5589 | \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
|
---|
5590 | \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
|
---|
5591 | \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
|
---|
5592 | \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
|
---|
5593 | \page\colophon
|
---|
5594 | % Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
|
---|
5595 | @end tex
|
---|
5596 |
|
---|
5597 |
|
---|
5598 | @contents
|
---|
5599 | @bye
|
---|